Garmin | G1000 NXi: Beechcraft Baron G58 | Garmin G1000 NXi: Beechcraft Baron G58 Pilot's Guide, G1000 NXi Beechcraft G58 - SSV 3185.00

Garmin G1000 NXi: Beechcraft Baron G58 Pilot's Guide, G1000 NXi Beechcraft G58 - SSV 3185.00
®
G1000
Pilot’s Guide
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
www.garmin.com
Pilot’s Guide
Beechcraft G58
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin AT, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
2345 Turner Road SE
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
®
190-02181-01
Revision A
Beechcraft G58 Series
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2017-2018 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 3185.00 or later for the G1000 NXi Beechcraft G58 Series. Some differences
in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G1000® NXi, WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Garmin ESP™, Garmin SVT™, SurfaceWatch™, and Connext™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Skywatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. Ryan®, TCAD® and Avidyne® are registered trademarks of
Avidyne Corporation. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered
trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc. Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker Flugfunkwerk GmbH. NavData® is a registered
trademark of Jeppesen, Inc. Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are
provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation from
terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot independently
verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The primary
barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations, requirements,
instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap data
is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic within
range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information from aircraft
or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information
shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data
for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be older than the
indicated weather product age.
WARNING: Do not rely on the displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) as the sole source of obstacle and terrain
avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Do not operate this equipment without first obtaining qualified instruction.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that may be incompatible
with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned in error as displayed.
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with vertical
guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and heading indications in the following geographic areas (due
to variations in the earth’s magnetic field): North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South of 70° South latitude
at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of
70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between
longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E.
(Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use SurfaceWatch™ information as the primary method of flight guidance during airborne or
ground operations. SurfaceWatch does not have NOTAM or ATIS information regarding the current active runway,
condition, or information about the position of hold lines.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance. Garmin
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability upon
which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the
aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or objects are within the
MPEL boundary.
WARNING: Always position the weather radar gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of precipitation. Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color not representative
of the true intensity.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will harm the
anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Do not allow repairs to be made by anyone other than an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information. Always
confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of
all GPS equipment. Portions of the system use GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore,
as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become
unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
iv
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of attitude
and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards away from the
source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition
65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to our web site at www.garmin.
com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields can cause
sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the Navigation
Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures due to differences
in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in SAIB
CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at www.flygarmin.
com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their impact on
the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation
Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes;
or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to FlyGarmin.
com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: Electronic aeronautical charts displayed on this system have been shown to meet the guidance in AC 120
76D as a Type B Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) for FlightCharts and ChartView. The accuracy of the charts is subject to
the chart data provider. Own-ship position on airport surface charts cannot be guaranteed to meet the accuracy
specified in AC 120-76D. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary source of aeronautical charts,
such as traditional paper charts or an additional electronic display, necessary on the aircraft and available to the
pilot. If the secondary source of aeronautical charts is a Portable Electronic Device (PED), its use must be consistent
with the guidance in AC 120-76D.
NOTE: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more discharge
points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen has
been cleared.
NOTE: Operate G1000 NXi system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous operation
to avoid an autonomous system reboot.-
vi
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ
THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the software
embedded in the Garmin Product (the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title,
ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You
acknowledge that the Software is the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of
America copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of
the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains
a valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify,
reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any derivative
works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in violation of the export control
laws of the United States of America.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
vii
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Blank Page
viii
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02181-00
Revision
A
B
Date
1/6/17
5/18/17
190-02181-01
A
6/1/18
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Page Range
Description
All
Production Release for GDU 20.05
All
Updated Surfacewatch information
Clerical
All
Production release for GDU 20.83
Updated EIS information
Added WireAware
Added Visual Approaches
Added Baro QFE Altimeter settings
Added Connext Weather
Added Electronic Stability and Protection
Updated Audio Panel Information
Updated Weather Radar
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................... 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).......................................... 1
System Controls......................................................... 4
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 4
Secure Digital Cards....................................................... 7
System Operation...................................................... 8
System Power-up........................................................... 8
Normal Operation.......................................................... 8
Reversionary Mode........................................................ 9
System Annunciations.................................................. 10
System Status.............................................................. 11
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 12
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 14
Accessing System Functionality............................. 19
Softkey Function.......................................................... 19
Menus........................................................................ 24
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 25
Split Screen Functionality............................................. 28
System Settings........................................................... 30
System Utilities............................................................ 40
Display Backlighting................................................ 44
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................... 48
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 48
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 49
Altimeter.................................................................... 51
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 55
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 55
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 57
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 60
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 69
Generic Timer.............................................................. 69
Temperature Displays................................................... 70
Wind Data.................................................................. 70
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 72
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 72
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 72
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 73
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 73
x
2.4 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)......................... 75
SVT Operation............................................................. 76
SVT Features............................................................... 78
Field of View............................................................... 87
2.5 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 89
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 89
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 90
SVT Unusual Attitudes.................................................. 91
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 Engine Display.......................................................... 94
Engine Softkeys........................................................... 96
Exhaust Gas Temperature............................................. 97
Cylinder Head Temperature........................................... 97
Lean Engine ............................................................... 97
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 99
3.2 EIS Display (Reversionary Mode)............................ 100
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 101
PFD Controls and Frequency Display............................ 102
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 104
COM Operation...................................................... 107
COM Tuning Boxes..................................................... 107
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 108
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency................................. 108
Frequency Spacing.................................................... 111
NAV Operation....................................................... 112
NAV Tuning Boxes..................................................... 112
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 113
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 113
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD............... 114
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 116
DME Tuning.............................................................. 117
Mode S Transponder.............................................. 118
Transponder Controls................................................. 118
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 119
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 121
IDENT Function......................................................... 122
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 122
Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 123
Power-Up.................................................................. 123
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 123
Speaker (GMA 1347).................................................. 123
Speaker (GMA 1360).................................................. 123
Intercom (GMA 1347)................................................ 124
Intercom (GMA 1360)................................................ 125
Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
(GMA 1360).............................................................. 127
3D Audio (GMA 1360)................................................ 128
Bluetooth® (GMA 1360 Only)..................................... 130
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 131
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 132
4.6 Audio Panels Preflight Procedure........................ 133
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 134
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 134
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 134
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation.................................. 134
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 134
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction............................................................ 135
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar............................ 137
Using Map Displays............................................... 138
Map Orientation........................................................ 138
Map Range............................................................... 140
Map Panning............................................................. 142
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 144
Topography............................................................... 144
Map Symbols............................................................ 147
Airways.................................................................... 151
Additional Navigation Map Items................................ 153
Waypoints............................................................... 156
Airports.................................................................... 157
Non-Airport Waypoints............................................... 163
Airspaces................................................................. 171
Nearest Airspace....................................................... 172
Smart Airspace.......................................................... 174
Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 175
Flight Planning....................................................... 180
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 183
Creating a Flight Plan................................................ 186
Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications............ 187
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Flight Plan Operations................................................ 195
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 198
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 199
Managing Flight Plans............................................... 202
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 212
Altitude Constraints................................................... 214
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)................................... 216
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 220
Departures................................................................ 222
Arrivals .................................................................... 225
Approaches .............................................................. 228
5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 238
Trip Planning............................................................. 238
5.10 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 242
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Link Weather................................................. 246
Activating Data Link Weather Services......................... 247
Weather Product Age................................................. 250
Displaying Data Link Weather Products........................ 254
Connext Data Requests.............................................. 263
Weather Product Overview......................................... 266
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 300
Abnormal Operations for Garmin Connext Weather...... 301
Airborne Color Weather Radar............................. 303
System Description.................................................... 303
Principles of Airborne Weather Radar........................... 303
Safe Operating Distance............................................. 308
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup............................................. 309
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 311
Ground Mapping and Interpretation............................ 324
Additional Weather Radar Displays.............................. 324
System Status............................................................ 327
Stormscope Lightning Detection System............ 329
Using the Stormscope Page........................................ 329
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 331
Terrain Displays...................................................... 333
Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 334
Terrain Page.............................................................. 339
Wire Obstacle Information and Alerting....................... 340
Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Terrain........................ 340
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Alerting Displays.................... 343
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance............................. 346
Additional TAWS-B Alerting........................................ 346
Inhibiting Alerting...................................................... 349
System Status............................................................ 349
6.5 Traffic Information Service (TIS)........................... 352
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 353
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 354
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 355
System Status............................................................ 357
6.6 TAS Traffic................................................................ 359
TAS Theory of Operation............................................. 359
TAS Alerts................................................................. 363
System Test............................................................... 364
Operation................................................................. 365
6.7 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 371
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 371
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting (CSA)........... 373
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 374
Traffic Description...................................................... 375
Operation................................................................. 375
ADS-B System Status................................................. 381
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Overview....................................................... 385
AFCS Controls on the MFD......................................... 386
Additional AFCS Controls........................................... 387
Basic Autopilot Operation........................................... 388
7.2 Flight Director Operation...................................... 389
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 389
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 390
Flight Director Modes................................................. 391
Command Bars.......................................................... 391
7.3 AFCS Modes............................................................ 392
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 392
Lateral Modes........................................................... 398
Combination Modes (VNV, APR, NAV, GA).................... 402
7.4 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation................ 414
Flight Control............................................................ 414
Engagement.............................................................. 415
xii
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 415
Disengagement......................................................... 416
7.5 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts............................ 417
AFCS CAS Messages.................................................. 417
Overspeed Protection................................................. 418
Underspeed Protection............................................... 418
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SafeTaxi................................................................... 422
Charts...................................................................... 424
ChartView................................................................. 425
FliteCharts................................................................ 433
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 438
Airport Directory.................................................... 441
SurfaceWatch.......................................................... 442
Information Box........................................................ 442
Alerts....................................................................... 443
Surfacewatch Setup................................................... 446
Database Cycle Number and Revisions............... 448
Cycle Number and Revision........................................ 448
SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 450
Satellite Radio Services............................................. 450
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 451
Satellite Telephone and SMS Messaging............ 454
Registering with Garmin Connext ............................... 454
Disable/Enable Iridium Transceiver.............................. 454
Telephone Communication......................................... 455
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 462
Connext Setup........................................................ 474
Flight Data Logging............................................... 476
Electronic Checklists.............................................. 478
Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™)............. 480
Roll Engagement....................................................... 480
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 482
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 483
Low AirSpeed Protection ........................................... 483
Stall Protection.......................................................... 484
Abnormal Operation.............................................. 485
SiriusXM Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting............... 485
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 487
CAS Message Prioritization......................................... 488
CAS Annunciations.................................................... 489
Audio Alerting System Test......................................... 490
System Message Advisories........................................ 490
Loading Updated Databases....................................... 501
Database Deletion Feature ........................................ 512
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 513
Aviation Terms and Acronyms......................................... 515
Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 525
Map Symbols.................................................................... 529
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
xiv
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000 NXi Integrated Avionics System as installed in the Beechcraft
G58 Baron. The system presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification
information to the pilot through large-format displays.
EIS
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1050 (1) – The GDU 1050 is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD). The display communicates
with the Multi Function Display (MFD) and with the #1 Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) through a High-Speed
Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
• GDU 1055 (1) – The GDU 1055 is configured as a Multi Function Display (MFD. The display communicates
with the PFD and with the #2 Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) through an HSDB Ethernet connection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GIA 63W / GIA 64W (2) – The GIA Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication
hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD and MFD. Each IAU contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS
receivers, a flight director (FD) and system integration microprocessors. Each IAU is paired with the PFD
and MFD via HSDB connection. The IAUs are not paired together and do not communicate with each other
directly.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GRS 77 / 79 (1) – The GRS Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and
heading information via ARINC 429 to both displays and both IAUs. The AHRS contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
information, and with the Air Data Computer to obtain air data. The AHRS communicates with both IAUs to
obtain GPS information.
AFCS
• GMU 44 (1) – The GMU Magnetometer measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the AHRS unit for
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. The Magnetometer receives communicates with and
receives power directly from the AHRS using an RS-485 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GDC 72 / 74A (1) – The GDC Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system as well
as the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) probe. This unit provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed
and OAT information to the system, and it communicates with the IAUs, PFD, MFD, and the AHRS, using an
ARINC 429 digital interface (it also interfaces directly with the Air Temperature Probe). The ADC is designed
to operate in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) airspace.
APPENDICES
• GEA 71 / GEA 71B (1) – The GEA Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and
airframe sensors. This unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
• GMA 1347 / GMA 1360 (1) – The GMA Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system
and marker beacon controls. This unit also enables the manual control of the display reversionary mode (red
DISPLAY BACKUP button) and communicates with the #1 IAU, using an HSDB connection. The optional
GMA 1360 offers Bluetooth® capability.
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GTX 335R/345R/33ES (1) – Solid-state transponder that provides Mode A, C, S capability. The optional
GTX 345R also provides ADS-B In/Out. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The transponder
communicates with the both IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GSA 81 (4), and GSM 86/85 (4) – The GSA Servos are used for the automatic control of roll, pitch, yaw, and
pitch trim. These units interface with each IAU.
The GSM 86/85 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 81 servo actuator
to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
EIS
• GWX 68 / GWX 75 (1) – The GWX 68 Airborne Weather Radar provides airborne weather and ground
mapped radar data to the MFD, through the GDL 69A, via HSDB connection. The GWX 75 is capable of
providing this data to both the PFD and MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDL 69A / GDL 69A SXM (1) (Optional) – The GDL SiriusXM Datalink Receiver provides data link weather
information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to PFD map) as well as digital audio entertainment. The unit
communicates with the MFD via HSDB connection. Subscriptions to the SiriusXM Weather or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio are required to enable services.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GSR 56 (1) (Optional) – The GSR Iridium Transceiver operation for voice communication is by means of
pilot and copilot headsets in the cockpit. The transceiver can provide Garmin Connext Weather and SMS
functions.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight Stream 510 (1) (Optional) – The Flight Stream Bluetooth Transceiver provides wireless connectivity
between a compatible tablet/mobile device and the avionics system. GPS, AHRS, ADC, ADS-B, traffic, SiriusXM
audio, and weather data can then be shared with the mobile device, and flight plans can be transferred to or
from the mobile device. Also, database updates may be performed using the Flight Stream 510 WiFi link.
• GTS 800/820 (Optional) – The GTS Traffic Advisory System (TAS) uses active interrogations of Mode S and
Mode C transponders to provide traffic information to the pilot independent of the air traffic control system.
AFCS
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are also shown in Figure
1-1. The system is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• GDL 69A / GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
• KN 63 DME
• GTS 800/820 Traffic Advisory System
• Skywatch Traffic Advisory System
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• WX 500 Stormscope Lightning Sensor
2
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GWX 68/75
(Weather Radar)
#2
GDU 1055
(MFD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GTS 800/820
(TAS)
GDL 69A/ GDL
69A SXM (XM
Weather/
Audio Datalink)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
(GWX 75 Only)
#1
GDU 1050
(PFD)
FS 510
(SD Card Bluetooth Link)
GMA 1347/1360
(Audio Panel)
#2 GIA
63W/64W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GRS 77/79
(AHRS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
#1 GIA
63W/64W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
EIS
GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
VHF COM
VHF COM
GTX 345R
Or
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
GTX 335R/33
(Transponder)
Flight
Director
G/S
Flight
Director
GEA 71/71B
(Engine &
Airframe I/F)
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
G/S
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDC 74A/72
(Air Data
Computer)
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
AFCS
GSA 81 (4)
(Servos)
GSR 56
(Iridium Transceiver)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
KN-63
(DME)
L-3 Skywatch
SKY 497
(TAS)
Garmin Equipment
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
APPENDICES
WX500 Stormscope
(Lightening
Sensor)
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
INDEX
Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide.
This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel controls are described in the CNS & Audio Panel section.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the PFD and
MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
5
4
3
6
7
8
9
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
17
18
24
10
13
19
25
11
14
20
26
12
15
21
27
22
28
23
29
INDEX
*MFD Only
4
16
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage).
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF.
2 NAV Frequency Trans- Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
fer Key
3 NAV Knob
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
4 *Heading Knob
9
12 CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
13 MENU Key
15 ENT Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes.
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport.
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry.
APPENDICES
14 PROC Key
Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route).
Displays flight plan information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11 FPL Key
)
AFCS
10 Direct-to Key (
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
EIS
5
Turn to manually select a heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference to the flight director.
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading.
Turn to change map range.
Joystick
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning.
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting.
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn the small knob to set the pilot-selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or
OBS/SUSP mode is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected
VOR. The pilot-selected course provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director
when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station.
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
COM Knob
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2.
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies.
COM Frequency
Transfer Key (EMERG) Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
the active frequency field.
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency Box).
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16 FMS Knob
EIS
17
18
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
19
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
20
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location).
System Knob)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group).
Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the thousands,
*ALT SEL Knob
the small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard system altitude
alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold
mode of the AFCS.
Engages/disengages the Autopilot and Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral
*AP Key
modes.
*FD Key
Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only. Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral modes. Pressing the FD key again deactivates the Flight
Director and removes the command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the Autopilot
is engaged, the FD key is disabled.
Selects/deselects the Navigation mode.
*NAV Key
21
*ALT SEL Key
Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode.
22
*VS Key
Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.
23
*FLC Key
Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change mode.
24
*YD Key
Engages/disengages the Yaw Damper.
25
*HDG Key
Selects/deselects the Heading Select mode.
26
*APR Key
Selects/deselects the Approach mode.
27
Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode
28
*VNV Key
(if equipped)
*NOSE UP Key
29
*NOSE DN Key
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
*This Key only appears on the MFD.
6
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The data card slots on the PFD and MFD use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion
of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots.
Inserting and Removing an SD card:
EIS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel. To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
AFCS
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation, system status, AHRS
modes of operation, and GPS receiver operation.
SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
NOTE: See the current, pertinent flight manual for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize
and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Remain Stationary’. All system annunciations should disappear typically within
one minute of power-up.
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• IFR/VFR charts database information
• Crew Profile
• Copyright
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.5). In
APPENDICES
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
INDEX
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
8
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-4 System Normal Operation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
REVERSIONARY MODE
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the event of a display failure, the system can be manually switched to reversionary (backup) mode (all
remaining displays enter reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented
on the remaining display(s) in the same format as in normal operating mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display, and the NAV and COM functions provided to the failed display by the
IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup paths for the AHRS, ADC,
Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is completely automated for
all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
Reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button.
Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
AFCS
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
Figure 1-5 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (refer to Table 1-1 for example flags and the responsible LRUs).
NOTE: Refer to the current, pertinent flight manual for additional information regarding pilot responses to
EIS
these annunciations.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Annunciation
Comment
System Annunciation
Air Data, Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from the
AHRS or magnetometer.
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
AFCS
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present.
APPENDICES
Comment
INDEX
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from the air
data computer.
Other Various Red X
Indications
Display system is not
receiving valid Ground Speed
information from the GPS.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
10
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks; failed by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin-authorized
dealer informed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-6 Example System Status Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page select the applicable list (‘LRU Information’
or ‘Airframe’ Window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected
window.
AFCS
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is selected) places the
cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD. Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label back to MFD1
DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ANN Test Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
Viewing LRU Information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
APPENDICES
Press the LRU Softkey
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key
b) With the ‘Select LRU’ Window highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
EIS
In addition to using internal sensors, the AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air data
to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data
information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available and depend upon the
combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated
to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and its
annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for information
on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when an update is
available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being displayed to the
pilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
NO
YES
Mag Data Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
YES
APPENDICES
AHRS Normal
Mode
NO
Air Data Available and Reliable?
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Heading Invalid
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
Attitude/Heading Invalid
INDEX
Figure 1-7 AHRS Operation
12
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
EIS
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs
are available and valid.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified receiver
(GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
EIS
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. If
no failure message exists, check the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.4 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
14
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
EGNOS, MSAS
and WAAS
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS Selection
Softkeys
RAIM Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SBAS Softkey Selected
Figure 1-8 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
AFCS
The ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page displays satellites currently in view at their respective positions on a sky view
diagram. The sky view is always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the
inner circle representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
SATELLITE STATUS
APPENDICES
This ‘Satellite Status’ Box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix
is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and
vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal
position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a statistical error indication and not
an actual error measurement.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
GPS RECEIVER STATUS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page. When the receiver
is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. “Acquiring” is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for
computing a solution.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system will determine if messages are being received from the WAAS engine. If so, the SBAS will read
‘Active’. If no messages have been received for 4 seconds and SBAS providers are enabled, the SBAS status will read
‘Inactive’. If SBAS providers are disabled, SBAS status will read ‘Disabled’. Note, that a fix is not required, but rather
the status is determined by communication with the WAAS engine.
RAIM PREDICTION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area, and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the
intended approach.
AFCS
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to Map”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction requirements. Reference
the RAIM/Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at fly.garmin.com as required.
INDEX
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
16
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
Refer to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the system.
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
EIS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or User waypoints, if
required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
AFCS
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
INDEX
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SBAS SELECTION (SBAS SOFTKEY IS SELECTED)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the
‘SBAS’ Field in the ‘GPS Status’ Box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay for the ‘GPS Status’ Box
to be updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is
displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS)
below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar
appearance:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
18
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
EIS
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to press the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by
the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names
(displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-9 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
pressed to return to the previous level. If messages remain after acknowledgement, the Alerts Softkey is black
on white. The Alerts Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
Level 3
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
APPENDICES
Description
Displays the scroll key. Only selectable when the number of CAS messages exceeds the
CAS
capacity of the display window.
Scroll up list of CAS messages.
CAS Up
Scroll down list of CAS messages.
CAS Down
Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Map/HSI
Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Layout
Map Off Removes the PFD map from display (Inset, HSI, or Traffic).
Inset Map Displays the Inset Map.
HSI Map Displays the HSI Map.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Level 2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1
AFCS
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of softkeys are
indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the Map/HSI softkey is
shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI softkey will display another set of softkeys and
these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2 provides yet another set of softkey
functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the Level 3 column, etc.
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Inset Trfc
HSI Trfc
EIS
Traffic
TER
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Detail
WX LGND
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
METAR
Lightning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LTNG Off
Datalink
STRMSCP
AFCS
TFC Map
PFD Opt
SVT
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways
Terrain
HDG LBL
APT Sign
Wire
Wind
INDEX
Off
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
20
Description
Replaces the Inset Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Replaces the HSI Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Selects desired amount of map detail:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
Detail 3: Declutters land data
Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers,
lakes) and elevation scale on PFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map.
Off: Removes terrain
Displays/removes the name of the selected weather data provider (SiriusXM) and the
weather product icon and age box (for enabled weather products).
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (subscription optional)
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional)
Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM or Connext lightning information (based on
weather data source selection) on the PFD Map.
Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green when the
lightning function is off.
Selects the datalink weather source for the PFD Map
Adds or removes the display of Stormscope information on the PFD Map. The
softkey annunciator is green when the function is on. When the function is off, the
annunciator is gray.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys.
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current
aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
Displays power lines on the synthetic vision display.
Displays the wind option softkeys.
Wind information not displayed.
Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components.
Total wind direction arrow and numeric speed.
Total wind direction arrow with digital numeric direction and speed.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
DME
Bearing 1
ALT Units
STD Baro
Cycles through FMS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
Displays the ‘DME Tuning’ Window, allowing tuning and selection of the DME
(optional).
XPDR
Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any interrogations).
Standby
On
ALT
0-7
Ident
Ident
Ident
APPENDICES
TMR/REF
Nearest
Alerts
or
Message
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADSB TX
AFCS
BKSP
Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only).
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen.
Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen.
Enables/disables automatic transmission of ADS-B position and speed.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen.
Displays ‘Timer/References’ Window.
Displays ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
Displays the ‘Alerts’ Window when pressed. System generated messages cause the
Alerts Softkey label to change to a flashing ‘Message’ label. Pressing the Message
Softkey opens the ‘Alerts Window, acknowledges the message, and the softkey reverts
to the ‘Alerts’ label.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VFR
Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CDI
DME
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OBS
EIS
Meters
IN
HPA
Description
Displays ‘DME Information’ Window (optional).
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/waypoint
identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency, and Off.
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/waypoint identifier
and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency, and Off.
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury.
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopascals.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are selected).
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg).
When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Bearing 2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Table 1-2 PFD Softkeys
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on the page group
and screen selected.
EIS
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the Navigation Map
screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and flight planning functions
may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and weather softkey descriptions may
be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of optional equipment and corresponding
softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features Section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level 1
Engine
Level 2
Level 3
Engine
Lean
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CYL SLCT
Assist
System
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DEC Fuel
INC Fuel
166 GAL
194 GAL
Map Opt
AFCS
Traffic
Inset
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Off
VSD
INDEX
TER
22
Description
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; select again to exit
page (see the EIS Section for more information).
Displays second-level softkeys for additional EIS configuration.
Displays default EIS display.
Displays EIS lean display.
Allows selection of engine cylinder to view additional information.
Enables/disables leaning assist mode.
Decreases calculated fuel remaining by 1 gallon for each softkey press.
Increases calculated fuel remaining by 1 gallon for each softkey press.
Resets calculated fuel remaining to 166 gallons and resets fuel used to zero.
Resets calculated fuel remaining to 194 gallons and resets fuel used to zero.
Displays system oil pressure and temperature, fuel calculations, and electrical system
information.
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map Page.
Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Removes VSD inset from Navigation Map Page.
Displays VSD profile information of terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical
track vector, and selected altitude.
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for active flight plan information or along current track with no
active flight plan.
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Checklist
Description
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
AWY
Off: No airways are displayed.
On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional).
STRMSCP
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional).
NEXRAD
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
XM LTNG
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional).
METAR
Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
Legend
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts.
Displays chart display settings softkeys (if available).
CHRT Opt
ROT CCW Rotates chart 90 degrees counter clockwise.
ROT CW Rotates chart 90 degrees clockwise.
Fit WDTH Chart zoom adjusted to fill width of display.
Full SCN When the annunciator bar is green, full screen mode is enabled. The annunciator bar
is grey when in split screen mode.
Displays the chart associated with the current phase of flight.
SYNC
Returns to the selected airport information chart (Airport Diagram, Alternate
Info
Minimums, Climb/Descent Table, Diverse Vector Area, Hot Spot, INOP Components,
LAHSO, and Takeoff Minimums)
Displays departure procedure chart.
DP
Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
STAR
Displays approach procedure chart.
APR
When available, displays optional checklists
EIS
Charts
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Detail
Level 2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Table 1-3 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options with
‘Nearest’ Window
displayed on PFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Options with
‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’
Page displayed on MFD
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-10 Page Menu Examples
24
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
EIS
Active Page Title
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The page group and active
page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs. The
current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/
Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page
name in the list remains the same.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pages in
Current
Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Groups
Figure 1-11 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
APPENDICES
There are several pages which may be selected by selecting the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the active page title will change when a different page softkey is selected,
but the page will remain the same (i.e. the Radio and Info Softkeys show different active page titles (‘Aux - XM
Radio’ and ‘Aux - XM Information’ respective) within the same page, ‘XM Radio’.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Map (Map Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• IFR/VFR Charts
• Traffic Map
• Stormscope
• Weather Data Link (service optional)
EIS
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
• Terrain/ TAWS-B
• Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Departure Information (DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
• Intersection Information
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• VRP Information
Aux (Auxiliary Page Group)
• User Waypoint Information
• Trip Planning
• Utility
AFCS
• GPS Status
• System Setup 1/2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• XM Radio Pages
- XM Information (Info Softkey)
- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
• Satellite Phone
- Telephone (Phone Softkey)
APPENDICES
- Text Messaging (SMS Softkey)
• System Status
• Video (optional)
• ADS-B Status
INDEX
• Connext Setup
• Databases
26
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Plan Catalog
- Stored Flight Plan (via New Softkey)
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
• SurfaceWatch Setup (optional)
• Nearest Airports
• Nearest Intersections
EIS
• Nearest NDB
• Nearest VOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Nearest VRP
• Nearest User WPTS
• Nearest Frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Nearest Airspaces
Table 1-4 Page Group and Pages
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages
• Departure Loading
• Arrival Loading
AFCS
• Approach Loading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SPLIT SCREEN FUNCTIONALITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart pages may be viewed in split screen mode with either the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ or ‘FPL - Active
Flight Plan’ Page open. To activate the split screen functionality, press the Charts Softkey. Two display panes
are displayed on the MFD. If split screen is activated from the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, the page title will
show ‘Map - Chart + Navigation Map’. If split screen is activated from the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, the
page title will change to show ‘FPL - Chart + Active Flight Plan’.
Page Title shows
‘Map - Chart + Navigation Map’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
MFD in Split Screen Mode (Narrow View)
Cyan Pane Selector
shows Charts is the
active display pane
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-12 Split Screen Mode
Softkeys for the
active display pane
CONTROLLING DISPLAY PANES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In split screen mode, the active display pane is outlined by a cyan box called the pane selector. Softkeys
and menu options will automatically change depending on which display pane is active. Display panes may
be displayed vertically in Narrow View, or horizontally in Wide View. In Narrow View, move the Joystick left
or right to move the pane selector. In Wide View, move the Joystick up and down to move the pane selector.
To change between Wide View and Narrow View, push and hold the Joystick.
28
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD in Split Screen Mode (Wide View)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pane Selector Box
Figure 1-13 Split Screen in Wide View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cyan Pane Selector
shows Charts
is the active
display pane
EIS
- Move Joystick in
direction of cyan
arrows to move
display pane
- Push and hold
Joystick to change
Narrow/Wide view
Softkeys for the
active display pane
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
For information on viewing Charts and the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page with the flight plan map, see the
Flight Management Section.
For more information on Charts and how to enable Charts Full Screen, see the Additional Features Section.
Enabling/disabling split screen mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page or the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page press the Charts Softkey, or press
the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode On’. If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN
Softkey to disable full screen mode.
AFCS
2) To disable the split screen mode, press the Charts Softkey again or press the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode
Off’. The display returns to the base page, either the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page or the ‘FPL - Active Flight
Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings are managed from the System Setup Pages. Fields shown in cyan text may be edited. Managing
crew profiles, system time format, display units, arrival alerts, and audio voice format settings are discussed in
this section. For other system settings, see the reference given to their respective sections.
If desired, the default system settings may be restored at any time.
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
The message ‘Restore Setup X Page Defaults?’ is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Configure System
Time
Fields shown in Cyan may
be edited
Change Display
Unit Settings
Configure arrival alert settings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Enable / disable alert
- Set arrival alert trigger distance
Baro QFE Altimter
Settings
AFCS
Restore System Defaults
Crew Profile
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
default profile)
- Import / Export profile to
SD Card
Change settings for
Page Group Navigation
- FMS knob clicks to change
page group
- Page Group Window
seconds until timeout
APPENDICES
Change audio
alert voice setting
Select System Setup Page
INDEX
Figure 1-14 System Setup 1/2 Pages
30
- Setup 1
- Setup 2
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CREW PROFILES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. The system can store up to 25 profiles; the currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of
the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Crew Profile’. From here, crew profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD card, or imported from
an SD card into the system.
Crew Profile Import/Export Messages
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
EIS
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid crew profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displayed if the maximum number for crew profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘No crew profile files found.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available crew profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Crew profile import failed.’
‘Crew profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Crew profile export failed.’
‘Crew profile export succeeded.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 1-5 Crew profile Import/Export Messages
Creating a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
EIS
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the Crew Profile Box.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
32
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) The system displays the Crew Profile Importing window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Crew Profile Importing window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.. The
imported profile becomes the active profile.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
AFCS
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Import Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-15 Pilot Profile Import (Aux - System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page..
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the Crew Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key
with ‘Export’ highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on
the SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key
to return to the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR
Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
AFCS
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-16 Pilot Profile Export on the Aux - System Setup Page
34
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATE/TIME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
EIS
Figure 1-17 System Time (UTC Format)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. If local time
format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ field is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
Category
Navigation Angle
Settings
Magnetic (North)*
True (North)
Distance and Speed
Metric
Nautical*
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
†
Altitude and Vertical Speed
Feet*
Meters
Temperature
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Fuel and Fuel Flow***
Gallons
Weight**
Pounds*
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’*
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Position
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
††
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
†††
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
†††
N/A
All positions
APPENDICES
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
*** Not configurable
† Excludes: airspeed indicator, altitude, true airspeed (PFD), wind speed vector, map range (‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page,
‘Map - TAWS-A (or TAWS-B)’ Page), CDI scaling (System Setup), and fuel range calculation (EIS))
†† Excludes: altimeter, Vertical Speed Indicator, and VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan). QFE settings can be in meters.
††† Excludes: Engine Indication System (EIS)
INDEX
Table 1-6 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
36
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing a display unit setting:
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
BARO TRANSITION ALERT
See the Flight Instruments Section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
EIS
AIRSPACE ALERTS
See the Flight Management Section for a discussion on Airspace Alerts settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ARRIVAL ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ‘Arrival Alert’ Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page allows the alerts to be turned ‘On/Off’ and the
alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the ‘Alerts’ Window and the PFD Navigation Status
Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a user-specified distance from
the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan). When Arrival Alerts is set
to ‘On’, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message is displayed in the PFD Navigation
Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window. When
Arrival Alerts is set to ‘Off’, only the PFD Navigation Status Box message “Arriving at waypoint” is displayed,
and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is approximately ten seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-18 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling/disabling the Alerts Window arrival alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘On/Off’ field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
SURFACEWATCH
EIS
See the Additional Features Section for a discussion on SurfaceWatch settings.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Flight Director command bars format is set to Single Cue and may not be changed. See the AFCS
Section for more information.
BARO QFE
See the Flight Instruments Section for more information on Baro QFE settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
See the Flight Management Section for a discussion on the MFD Data Bar Fields settings.
GPS CDI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
See the Flight Instruments Section for a discussion on setting the GPS CDI format.
COM CONFIGURATION
See the Audio Panel & CNS Section for a discussion on the COM Configuration for channel spacing.
AFCS
NEAREST AIRPORT
See the Flight Management Section for a discussion on the Nearest Airport settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
See the Additional Features Section for more information on the Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP)
settings.
APPENDICES
STABILITY & PROTECTION
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages listed within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the Page
Group Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the Page Navigation box on the Aux - System
Setup 2 Page.
PAGE NAVIGATION
INDEX
Off – Displays the Page Group Window with one click of either FMS Knob.
On – Displays the Page Group Window and navigates to the next page group with one click of either FMS Knob.
38
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The pilot can select, from the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page, the amount of time the Page Group Window is
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
Selecting page navigation settings:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ field in the ‘Page Navigation’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ field in the ‘Page Navigation’ Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUDIO ALERTS
The ‘Audio’ Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice field in the ‘Audio’ Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired voice setting and press the ENT Key.
Enabling/Disabling 3D Audio:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Pilot 3D Audio’ or ‘Copilot 3D Audio’ ‘On/ Off’ Field in the Audio Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn 3D Audio On or counterclockwise to turn Off.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Swapping left/right audio in a headset:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Pilot L-R Swap’ or ‘Copilot L-R Swap’ ‘On/ Off’ Field in the Audio Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the Swap On or counterclockwise to turn Off.
CHARTS
See the Additional Features Section for a discussion on chart settings.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM UTILITIES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the ‘Aux - Utility’
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-19 Utility Page
TIMERS
The system timers available on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page include:
• Stopwatch-like generic timers
AFCS
• Total-time-in-flight timer
• Time since departure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on
a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits return
to zero.
Setting the generic timer:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
40
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
EIS
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the System Setup Page.
AFCS
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EIS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are
reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SCHEDULER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Switch fuel
tanks”, “Overhaul”, etc.) in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically
reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained
until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Scheduler messages appear in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to change
to a flashing ‘Message’ label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the “Alerts” Window and acknowledges the
scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the “Alerts” label. Pressing the Alerts Softkey again removes the
‘Alerts’ Window from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
Figure 1-20 PFD Alerts Window
42
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty field within the ‘Scheduler’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter text within the ‘Message’ Field to be displayed in the ‘Messages’ Window and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Type’ Field.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• ‘Event’ — Message issued at the specified date/time
• ‘One-time’ — Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ‘Periodic’ — Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Message’ Field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Auto’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
Figure 1-21 PFD Setup Menu
44
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional indications such as bugs and
annunciations on selected flight instruments during certain AFCS flight director modes. Refer to the
AFCS for more information about these indications.The system includes an easy-to-scan Primary Flight
Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation
information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather
information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• ISA temperature deviation
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Ground Speed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Vspeed reference bugs
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– True Airspeed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Indicated Airspeed
EIS
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
– DME Information Window (optional)
• DME Tuning Window
• Altimeter, showing
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• References Window, showing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Trend vector
– Generic timer
– Selected altitude
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
• Wind data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Barometric or temperature compensated
minimum descent altitude (MDA) or decision
height (DH)
AFCS
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Vspeed values
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations discussed throughout this Pilot’s Guide.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22
20
21
1
19
18
17
2
EIS
16
15
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
14
5
13
6
12
7
11
8
10
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Heading Bug
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Turn Rate Indicator
3
True Airspeed
14
Barometric Altimeter Setting
4
Ground Speed
15
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
5
Current Heading
16
Selected Altitude Bug
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
17
Altimeter
7
ISA Temperature Deviation
18
Reference Altitude
8
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
19
COM Frequency Box
9
Softkeys
20
Navigation Status Box
10
System Time
21
Slip/Skid Indicator
11
Transponder Data Box
22
Attitude Indicator
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
46
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10
9
8
1
EIS
7
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
Selected Heading
6
Flight Plan Window
2
Wind Data Box
7
Selected Course
3
Inset Map
8
4
Bearing Information Windows
9
Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
Vertical Deviation Indication
5
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
10
VNV Target Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
AFCS
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
EIS
9
8
1
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-3 Attitude Indicator
AFCS
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 90˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology System (Garmin SVT™) is activated, the pitch
scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about
Synthetic Vision.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major roll marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor roll
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
Figure 2-4 Slip/Skid Indication
48
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the current pertinent flight manual for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The numeric labels and
major tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 40 knots of airspeed viewable at
any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching
never exceed speed (VNE), then it becomes red. The true airspeed is displayed in knots below the Airspeed
Indicator. The ground speed is displayed to the left of the true airspeed.
EIS
Airspeed Trend
Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VMCA Red
Bar
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VYSE Blue
Bar
Indicated
Airspeed
Vspeed Reference
Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed Ranges
Figure 2-6 Red Pointer
Showing Airspeed Above VNE
True Airspeed
Ground Speed
AFCS
Figure 2-5 Airspeed Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A color-coded (red, white, green, amber) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote
flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). Speeds above the
never-exceed speed (VNE), appear in the high speed warning range, represented on the airspeed tape by red/
white “barber pole” coloration.
APPENDICES
A horizontal red bar on the airspeed tape represents VMCA. A horizontal blue bar on the airspeed tape
represents VYSE.
A red low speed awareness range extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA. An aural stall warning is generated as the aircraft approaches a stall condition.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the number in the indicated airspeed pointer changes to amber. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
Vspeed
Bug
GLIDE
G
Vx
X
Vy
Y
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Black reference bugs with cyan letters appear along the right side of the airspeed scale denote GLIDE, VX, and
VY. The pilot can enable/disable the display of these bugs, as well as change their values. When the indicated
airspeed is below 20 knots, enabled Vspeeds Reference Bugs and their numeric values appear in a list at the
bottom of the airspeed tape, ordered from highest to lowest.
Table 2-1 Vspeed Bug Labels
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-7 VSpeed References
Enabling/disabling or modifying individual Vspeed Reference Bugs:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed value.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the On/Off field
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to On or counterclockwise to Off.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
References Window
APPENDICES
References Window Menu
Figure 2-8 References Window and Menu
The pilot can also enable/disable all Vspeed Reference Bugs as a group.
INDEX
Enabling/disabling Vspeed Reference Bugs as a group:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
50
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll as needed to highlight the desired selection.
4) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) To remove the References Window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
A solid white triangle represents the first notch of flaps speed. This reference is always enabled and its value
cannot be changed by the pilot.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-9 First Notch of Flaps Speed
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Altimeter displays barometric altitude values on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The pilot can
choose display units format for the Altimeter as feet or meters.
If the altitude is displayed in feet, the Altimeter shows 600 feet of barometric altitude at a time, with numeric
labels and major tick marks displayed at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the altitude is displayed in meters, the Altimeter shows 180 meters of barometric altitude at a time, with
numeric labels and major tick market displayed at intervals of 50 meters. Minor tick marks are at intervals of
10 meters.
The name of the selected units, ‘FEET’ or ‘METERS’ appears near the bottom of the altimeter.
The Indicated Altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
AFCS
Selecting the altitude display units:
1) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘ALT, VS’ datafield in the ‘Display Units’ Window.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either ‘Feet(FT,FPM)’ or ‘Meters(MT,MPS)’ and press the ENT Key. This
setting affects altitude displays system-wide, in addition to those shown on the PFD.
APPENDICES
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. See the AFCS Section for more information about
the Selected Altitude.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, with the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
T urn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for
100-ft increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments;
the small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments.
If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for
the Selected Altitude while turning the ALT SEL Knob.
EIS
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Indicated
Altitude
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-10 Altimeter
AFCS
The pilot can choose to display overlays for the indicated altitude and Selected Altitude using alternate
display units without changing the scale of the Altimeter. For example, if the Altimeter is displaying feet, the
system can show a metric overlay for the indicated and selected altitudes without changing the scale or display
units of the Altimeter.
Enabling altitude units overlays:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters or Feet Softkey to enable/disable the altitude overlays.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
INDEX
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
52
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD Baro Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 2-11 Standard Barometric Setting
EIS
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
BARO QFE ALTIMETER SETTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BARO QFE is the isobaric surface pressure at the airfield reference point. With BARO QFE set, the altimeter
will indicate zero at the airfield reference point or the touch-down zone of the runway in use. At other
altitudes, the altimeter will read an indication of the height above the reference point. A BARO QFE altimeter
setting should only be used in the terminal environment for the corresponding issuing airport to ensure
adequate obstacle clearance.
AFCS
The pilot can choose a QFE reference point based on data from the FMS origin, destination, or a manually
supplied value. The pilot can choose the FMS origin elevation source when the FMS flight plan contains
an origin and the aircraft is on the ground or in the departure flight phase. The pilot can choose the FMS
destination elevation source when the FMS flight plan contains a destination and the aircraft is in the air.
Otherwise, these options are subdued and only the manual QFE reference option is available for pilot selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the BARO QFE:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the REF field.
APPENDICES
4) To manually enter a reference point elevation, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Manual’ and press the ENT
Key.
a) Turn the large and small FMS Knobs to select a reference point altitude.
b) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the ENT Key.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
5) To select a reference point elevation based on the FMS origin, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘FMS ORIG’
and press the ENT Key.
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Or:
To select a reference point elevation based on the FMS destination, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘FMS
DEST’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) To enable or disable Baro QFE, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Baro QFE On/Off setting.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’, then press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
8) If an MDA/DH value has been set for the approach minimums, and the pilot subsequently disables the QFE
altimeter setting, a pop-up window appears. Highlight ‘OK’ with the FMS Knob to disable the QFE altimeter
setting and delete the approach minimums, or highlight ‘Cancel’ to keep the QFE altimeter setting enabled and
the approach minimums unchanged. Press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During QFE operations, an annunciation will be displayed to the left of the altimeter.
Figure 2-12 BARO QFE Altimeter Annunciation on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Baro Transition Alerts flash the barometric pressure setting to remind the pilot to change the barometric
pressure setting to or from standard. Two alerts are available. The altitude Baro Transition Alert occurs when
climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 feet below this altitude. The flight level Baro Transition
Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at 200 feet above this flight level. The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the barometric pressure setting. The pilot
can enable/disable either Baro Transition Alert, and choose the altitude or flight level used to trigger the alerts.
Setting the Baro Transition Alerts:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert based on altitude, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or
‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Altitude in the BARO Transition Alert Box.
4) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Altitude On or Off.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Altitude field.
APPENDICES
6) Use the FMS Knobs to change the altitude and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key to return to
the previous altitude selection.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Level.
8) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Flight Level On or Off.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Flight Level field.
INDEX
10) Use the FMS Knobs to change the Flight Level for the alert and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR
Key to return to the previous altitude selection.
11) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
54
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS is available.
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-13) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels
at 1000 and 2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or
descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the
edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
EIS
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) uses a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical deviation
when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used; the VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute”
alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation
becomes invalid. See the Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer to
Section 2.3, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active
NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107˚. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope
Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no
glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
APPENDICES
Figure 2-13 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
Glideslope
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Required
Vertical
Speed
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
AFCS
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Figure 2-14 Glideslope Indicator
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Glidepath Indicator is a vertical deviation scale for GPS approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (L/VNAV, LPV) or advisory vertical guidance (LNAV+V, LP+V, Visual). The Glidepath Indicator, a
magenta diamond appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the active waypoint,
and GPS is the selected navigation source. Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower
limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limits depend on approach service level.
•
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, and LP+V, and Visual is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
•
LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
EIS
A hollow gray diamond represents a preview of the glidepath indicator. This is shown while inbound to the
FAF waypoint, but before the FAF waypoint is the next active waypoint. The preview is also shown when the
AFCS is coupled to the Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH) while inbound to the FAF waypoint, until the
AFCS captures the glidepath; refer to the AFCS section for more information about Vertical Path Tracking Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The hollow gray preview diamond changes to a solid magenta diamond to indicate the glidepath indicator is
active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
Glidepath
Preview
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Glidepath
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach and SBAS is unavailable, baro-VNAV (barometric vertical
navigation) is used for vertical guidance. This occurs due to any of the following conditions:
INDEX
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach, and between the FAF and MAP, the Vertical Deviation Limit
Indicators appear as vertical white lines (Figure 2-16) indicating the area where deviation exceeds allowable
limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet
of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents the area of acceptable deviation. The
length of the lines will change while progressing through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator
enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators are amber.
APPENDICES
Figure 2-15 Glidepath Indicator
56
•
SBAS fails or becomes unavailable prior to the FAF
•
The aircraft is outside of SBAS coverage
•
SBAS is manually disabled on the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Baro-VNAV is also the source of vertical approach guidance if the LNAV/VNAV procedure does not support
SBAS vertical guidance.
While baro-VNAV is being utilized, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta pentagon.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
White
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicators
Glidepath
Indicator
(BaroVNAV)
Amber
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
(excessive
deviation
occurring)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-16 Glidepath Indicator (Baro-VNAV) and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The HSI also
presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation source information. The HSI is available
in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset
Maps.
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
AFCS
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.
APPENDICES
The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course Pointer, To/
From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1,
and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/
From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system is receiving the active NAVAID.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
15
14
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
12
2
3
11
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4
5
10
6
9
7
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
Course Pointer
11
4
Navigation Source
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
12 Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
Lateral Deviation Scale
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Card
15
8
OBS Mode Active
Lubber Line
Figure 2-17 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay capabilities such as topographical, weather, and land information. The HSI Map contains a Course Pointer, a combined To/
From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral deviation scale. Upon passing a station, the To/
From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the HSI Map
can appear either as an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight Management
Section for information about using HSI Map overlays.
58
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Navigation Source
Course Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Course Deviation
Indicator and To/
From Indicator
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-18 HSI Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A digital reading of the current heading appears above the rotating compass card. A magenta diamond on
the HSI represents the current track over the ground the aircraft is flying. To the upper left of the HSI, the
Selected Heading is shown in cyan, which corresponds to the cyan heading bug on the compass rose. The
Desired Track (DTK) is shown in magenta to the upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is
GPS and OBS Mode is not active. The Selected Course (CRS) is shown to the upper right of the HSI when the
selected navigation source is VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected navigation source is GPS with OBS
Mode active. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the can appear in two different
ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
AFCS
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
Current Track Indicator
Selected Heading
APPENDICES
Current Heading
Selected Course
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 2-19 Heading and Course Indications
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag
Var’) or referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), set on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.
EIS
Figure 2-20 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight NAV Angle setting in the Display Units box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
• True - References angles to true north (T)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
AFCS
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Navigation
Source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight
Phase
APPENDICES
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
Figure 2-21 Course Deviation Indicator
INDEX
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by an GPSderived distance when coupled to the GPS. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol. When
navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI.
60
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-22 Navigation Sources
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing navigation sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AFCS
GPS
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-23 Selecting a Navigation Source
APPENDICES
The system automatically changes from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
INDEX
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically changes to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to
the FAF, it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically changes from GPS to
LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
Fix Prior to the FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Glideslope Intercept Point
Figure 2-24 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page and
the full-scale deflection setting may also be selected (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If
the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Format Allowed selection in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-25 Table 2-2).
62
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Missed
Approach
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-25 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
AFCS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually decreases from 2.0 nm to
1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to decrease from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm over a
distance of 1.0 nm.
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale decreases even further (Figures 2-26 and 2-27). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI changes to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
63
FAF
EIS
FAF
0.3 nm
course width
1.0 nm
angle based
on database
information
2 nm
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV, LNAV+V, and Visual Approach CDI
Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
2 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
angle based
on database
information
course width
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-27 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV, LP+V, and LP Approach
CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
64
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
LNAV + V
EIS
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-26)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
VISUAL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
L/VNAV
LPV
LP+V
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-27)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
AFCS
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to amber.
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TURN RATE INDICATOR
Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
INDEX
Half Standard
Turn Rate
APPENDICES
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Figure 2-28 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-29 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
INDEX
APPENDICES
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI to the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey annunciator
changes from gray to green to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-30. Pressing the SUSP
Softkey deactivates the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
66
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-30 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources by
pressing the PFD Opt Softkey then either the Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan
and are single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to
indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from
the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance
AFCS
DME Information Window
Bearing
Source
Pointer
Icon
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
APPENDICES
Station
Pointer
Identifier
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance to
Bearing Source
Figure 2-31 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-31) are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following
information:
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Frequency (NAV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)
EIS
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and dashes are displayed in the information window if the
NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with the NAV 1 source.
3) Press the bearing softkey again to display the bearing pointer with the NAV 2 source.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the bearing softkey again to display the bearing pointer with GPS as the source.
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AFCS
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The DME Information Window is displayed above the Bearing 1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the Bearing 1 Information Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
68
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including the
generic timer, temperatures, and wind data.
GENERIC TIMER
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing functions (either counting up or down) for the pilot.
EIS
Setting the generic timer:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Up/Dn field is now highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Up/Dn Window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is counting down, it will start
counting up after reaching zero.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
11) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD. Both temperatures are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) or
Fahrenheit (°F), depending on the selected temperature units on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-32 Outside Air Temperature
Changing the temperature display units:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Push the FMS Knob.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Temperature field.
4) Turn the small FMS knob to highlight ‘Celsius(ºC)’ or ‘Fahrenheit(ºF)’, then press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
WIND DATA
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
INDEX
Figure 2-33 Wind Data
70
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press one of the numbered Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• Option 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
• Option 2: Total wind direction arrow and numeric speed
• Option 3: Total wind direction arrow with numeric direction and speed
EIS
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
5) When finished, press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level PFD softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions pertaining to flight instruments are displayed on the PFD.
Refer to Appendix A for more information on alerts and annunciations.
ALTITUDE ALERTING
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
EIS
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a cyan
background and flashes for five seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to cyan text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-34 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation requires SBAS. Terrain alerts from Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems will
AFCS
appear instead of the Low Altitude Annunciation when these systems are operating and not inhibited.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
72
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS Inhibited
Annunciation
Glidepath
Indicator
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude
Annunciation
Figure 2-35 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Outer Marker
AFCS
Altimeter
Figure 2-36 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
APPENDICES
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set in
the References Window and is reset if the current approach is deleted, another approach is loaded, or the system
power is operated off then on. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the selected altitude on the Altimeter. The
following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
INDEX
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN or COMP
MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for
COMP MIN) once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text become white.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become amber and a “Minimums. Minimums,” voice
alert occurs.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-37 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’. ‘Off’ is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or
turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
AFCS
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then
enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-38 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
74
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
NOTE: Do not use the flight path marker as a flight director.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South latitude. This is due
to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process the data representing
the affected areas.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) is a visual enhancement to the system. SVT depicts a forwardlooking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of view is 29 degrees to
the left and 35.5 degrees to the right. During reversionary mode, field of view is 21.5 degrees to the left and 35.5
degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction
Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS
three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The
terrain data resolution of 4.9 arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares
measuring 4.9 arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data,
including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled (although the softkeys will still appear
functional) until the required data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Wire
obstacles, such as power lines, may be also shown in the vicinity of airports; refer to the WireAware™ discussion
later in this section for additional information. Cultural features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad
tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even if those features are found on the navigation maps. The
terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one
arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVT is integrated within
Garmin-SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant
to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
APPENDICES
Garmin-SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If SVT is enabled
when switching to Reversionary Mode, it will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD
display will be shown in the interim.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Garmin-SVT or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Path Marker
• Terrain Alerting
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Obstacle Alerting including wire obstacles
• Airport Signs
• Pathways
• Runway Display
• Traffic Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
AFCS
Figure 2-39 Synthetic Vision Imagery
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced from 20
degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
APPENDICES
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire. The Back Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
INDEX
Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated (gray
with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys
may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected
76
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, APT Sign and Wire softkeys is remembered by the
system.
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
• Wire Softkey enables the display of wire obstacles when the Terrain Softkey is enabled.
EIS
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
AFCS
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling/disabling the display of Power Line wire obstacles:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the Wire Softkey. Display of power line wires will cycle on or off with the Wire Softkey.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SVT FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Synthetic
Terrain
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 2-40 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
ZERO PITCH LINE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
APPENDICES
AIRPORT SIGNS
INDEX
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
78
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-41 Airport Signs
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
AFCS
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
APPENDICES
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
HORIZON HEADING
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
79
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Pathways Boxes
EIS
Flight Path
Marker (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind
Vector
Figure 2-42 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
PATHWAYS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
80
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Programmed
Altitudes
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-43 Programmed and Selected Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, some
LNAV and visual approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be
used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from
the display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
APPENDICES
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent. When the flight plan includes
programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the selected
altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
EIS
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
APPENDICES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
INDEX
Figure 2-44 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
82
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
by pathway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
MAHP
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-45 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
Other
Runway
on Airport
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Airport
Runway
INDEX
Figure 2-46 Airport Runways
84
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC
NOTE: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a partial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
symbol.
EIS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
TERRAIN ALERTING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts from the Terrain-SVT or optional TAWS system, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for
a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert on the navigation maps. These yellow or red areas
represent potential impact areas. For more detailed information about terrain displays and alerting, refer to
the Hazard Avoidance section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain
Annunciation
AFCS
Potential
Impact
Area
Caution
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-47 Terrain Alert
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols or
wind turbine symbols found on the maps. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the maps, which present obstacles as gray, yellow,
or red based on the obstacle height relative to the aircraft altitude, obstacles shown synthetic terrain display
are gray until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert, at which point an obstacle may be yellow
or red. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles may appear
behind the flight instruments.
AFCS
Figure 2-48 Obstacles with Caution
WIREAWARE POWER LINE OBSTACLES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The WireAware obstacle database does not contain all known power lines. And as such, obstacle
avoidance is the sole responsibility of the flight crew.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To enhance safety, SVT incorporates Garmin’s WireAware wire obstacle technology. WireAware database
information mainly includes Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) power lines which are typically high
voltage transmission lines depicted on the VFR Sectional charts, and are considered of special interest to
pilots. These include power lines which may span rivers, valleys, canyons, or be in close proximity to
airports/heliports. For wire obstacles present in the obstacle database, the system shows these on the maps
as well as the Synthetic Vision display; see Hazard Avoidance section for more information about WireAware
alerting.
86
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Potential
Impact
Wire
Caution
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-49 Wire Caution
FIELD OF VIEW
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. Two dashed lines forming
a V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Settings and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group Options to Field of View.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
87
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Field of
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Figure 2-50 Option Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
turned on.
AFCS
Lines
depict
PFD Field
of View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Obstacle
outside
Field of
View
INDEX
APPENDICES
Field of View on the MFD
SVT View on the PFD
Figure 2-51 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
88
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur (Figure
2-52). Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
Location
EIS
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
GPS LOI
Right of HSI
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
GPS INTEG OK Right of HSI
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS
Lower left of
DR
position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
aircraft symbol
waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-52 Example HSI Annunciations
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source. The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
APPENDICES
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
• Ground Speed
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
INDEX
• GPS bearing pointers
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose High
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Nose Low
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-53 Pitch Attitude Warnings
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• PFD Inset Map
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• ISA temperature deviation
– References Window
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Wind data
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Selected Heading readout
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Course readout
– Alerts
• True Airspeed
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
90
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom
of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great
enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme
pitch attitudes.
Blue Band
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-54 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
91
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Blank Page
92
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically monitoring critical
system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight. The Engine Indication System (EIS)
displays electrical, fuel, and engine information on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD). Engine
System and Lean information can be viewed by pressing the Engine Softkey and then pressing the Lean or
System Softkey.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-1 MFD (Normal Mode)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding displays flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red“X” is displayed
across the instrument.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
EIS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
Propeller
Sync
Indicator
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel Flow
Leaning
Markers
6
7
5
8
9
10
AFCS
11
Figure 3-3 Engine System Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-2 Engine Display
94
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
Tachometer Indicator
(RPM)
Displays engine tachometer in revolutions per minute (RPM)
Propeller Sync Indicator
The small white pointer located in the center of the Tachometer points towards the propeller turning
at a lower-speed.
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
4
Cylinder Head Temperature
Indicator
(CHT)
Displays cylinder head temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
5
Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL °C)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
6
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
7
Calculated Fuel Remaining
(GAL REM)
Displays the totalizer-based fuel remaining in gallons, adjusted using the DEC FUEL and INC
FUEL Softkeys
8
Calculated Fuel Used
(GAL Used)
Displays fuel used in gallons, based on fuel flow
9
Ampmeter
(ALT Load)
Displays current loads for each alternator (L and R) as a percentage of the capacity
10
Voltmeter
(Bus Volts)
Displays voltage for each bus (L and R)
11
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(Fuel QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each side of a standard fuel tank.
3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manifold Pressure Indicator Displays engine manifold pressure inches of mercury (IN HG)
(IN HG)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
EIS
Fuel Flow Leaning Markers (light blue) provide a leaning reference during a cruise or max
power climb (MPC). The pointers are displayed along the horizontal bar indicator if the
propeller speed exceeds 2530 rpm or fuel flow exceeds a specified value based on altitude
during a cruise or max power (MPC) climb.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
ENGINE SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EIS - Engine displays all engine, fuel, electrical, and fuel calculation information. To access this screen,
press the Engine Softkey. Refer to Table 3-1 for Engine softkey functions.
EIS
Level 1 Level 2
Engine
Lean
Level 3
Description
Displays EIS - Engine and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit the screen
Resets displayed fuel remaining to tabs and fuel used to zero
CYL SLCT Selects the engine cylinder to monitor during leaning operations
Displays peak temperature maker above cylinder
Assist
System
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DEC Fuel
INC Fuel
166 GAL
194 GAL
CO RST
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Sets the GAL REM to 166 gallons
Sets the GAL REM to 194 gallons
Resets the CO Detector (optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 3-1 Engine Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the ENGINE Softkey makes available the LEAN and SYSTEM softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-4 Engine Display
96
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) readout for the selected cylinder is shown at the left and right bottom corners
of the graph on the Engine System display. The temperature readout is displayed in degrees of Celsius (°C).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Cylinder Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-5 Exhaust Gas Temperatures (Normal)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) readout is shown at the left and right bottom corners of the graph on the
Engine System display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cylinder Head
Temperatures
AFCS
Figure 3-6 Cylinder Head Temperatures (CHT)
LEAN ENGINE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Exhaust Gas
Temperature
Peak
Lean of Peak
Indicator
INDEX
Figure 3-7 Exhaust Gas Temperatures (Lean Assist)
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Engine Leaning:
1) On the MFD Display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Engine softkey.
3) Press the Lean softkey.
From the Lean display, the CYL SLCT and Assist Softkeys can be utilized to obtain information about specific
cylinders on both the EGT and CHT graphs. Pressing the CYL SLCT Softkey cycles through the cylinders; the
selected cylinder number is displayed in cyan. The CYL SLCT Softkey is disabled during warning or caution
conditions or when the Assist Softkey is pressed.
EIS
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s EGT and CHT:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
From the Lean display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its EGT and CHT.
The selected cylinder is shown in light cyan.
When the Assist Softkey is selected, the system initially highlights and selects the cylinder number with the
hottest EGT and displays its temperature below the EGT bar graph. A readout showing the difference between
peak (DPEAK) and the current temperature for the selected cylinder is displayed above the EGT bar graph.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
As the mixture is leaned, a light cyan line will appear above each cylinder to indicate EGT peak.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the system detects the first cylinder to peak, the cylinder numbers below the EGT graph disappear,
and the letter “R” is annunciated below the first peaked cylinder to indicate the other cylinders are rich of
peak. As the mixture is further leaned, the letter “L” is annunciated below the last peaked cylinder indicating
all cylinders are lean of peak. Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for the recommended
mixture adjustment procedures.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Monitoring of the cylinder continues until the Assist Softkey is pressed again which disables lean assist and
removes the peak lines from the bar graph and the temperature deviation from peak (DPEAK). The system then
returns to seeking the hottest cylinder.
98
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Fuel calculations are based on the fuel flow totalizer and the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM), adjusted
using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
EIS
• RST Fuel – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to 194 gallons and fuel used display to zero
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to wind effects. For example, more
fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction is indicated by the
Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol.
The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled the Fuel Range Ring appears on the Navigation
Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling the Fuel Range Ring and selecting a reserve fuel time:
1) Display the Navigation Map screen.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Map Settings and press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
AFCS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the reserve fuel time, how long the aircraft can fly after reaching the
reserve fuel.
8) Enter the desired reserve fuel time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Screen.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 EIS DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a PFD or MFD display failure, the display(s) operating in Reversionary Mode are configured
to present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for information about
display reversionary mode).
The Engine Display, in reversionary mode, is identical to the normal EIS Display on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
EIS Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-8 Reversionary Mode (EIS Shown)
100
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panels, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponders. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the Beechcraft G58 is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
13
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ‘DME Tuning’ Window
102
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. If available, the
communication source description is displayed in green underneath the COM Frequency Box.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow between COM1 and COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by selecting the DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when ‘DME Tuning’ Window or ‘Nearest Airports’ Window is present. Press the FMS
Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small
knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
13
DME Softkey – Displays the ‘DME Tuning’ Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
25
17
7
8
13
14
9
10
15
16
11
12
26
8
14
27
28
15
16
29
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
11
12
20
21
19
18
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
31
17
PA Annunciation
32
Volume/Squelch
Annunciations
23
Volume
Annunciation
Squelch
Annunciation
24
35
24
GMA 1347
AFCS
34
33
GMA 1360
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a GMA 1347 key is selected, the annunciator above the key is illuminated. When a GMA 1360
INDEX
APPENDICES
Key is selected, the in-key annunciation is illuminated.
104
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
10
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
25
AUX MIC – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
PA – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
APPENDICES
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TEL – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
AFCS
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM3 – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
EIS
6
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 MIC – Not used in Beechcraft G58 aircraft.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5
105
26
PILOT ICS – Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable Bluetooth recording mode.
27
COPLT ICS – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable Bluetooth recording
mode.
28
MUS1 – Selects/Deselects the MUS1 audio source and assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS1 audio. Press
the MUS1 key until the annunciator turns blue. The in-key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The
Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time for each audio panel. Once the Bluetooth audio
is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
29
PASS ICS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable Bluetooth recording
mode.
30
MUS2 – Selects/Deselects the MUS2 audio source and can assign the Bluetooth device to the MUS2 audio.
Press the MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue. The in-key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The
Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time for each audio panel. Once the Bluetooth audio
is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
31
SPKR/PA – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the
SPKR/PA Key is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
32
Volume/Squelch Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
33
Volume/Squelch (VOL/SQ) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the
selected source (indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not
active press to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to cancel
the cursor, twice to activate Blue-Select mode). Press and hold for five seconds to enable the audio panel as
discoverable for pairing. The Bluetooth Annunciator will flash to indicate that the unit is discoverable. The
unit will remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once a successful pair is
established, the audio “Bluetooth paired” is played.
34
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue annunciator) to the desired
source.
35
Bluetooth® Connection Annunciator – A flashing cyan annunciator indicates the unit is discoverable. A solid
blue annunciator indicates an active Bluetooth connection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press and hold SPKR/PA for 2 seconds to select the PA system. When the PA is active the annunciation to
the right of the SPKR/PA softkey will be illuminated. The annunciator will flash when PA mode is active
and the PTT is pressed.
106
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TUNING BOXES
2
3
4
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
5
EIS
7
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-3 COM Tuning Box Indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
3
Standby Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
4
Frequency Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which COM transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field.
5
Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic Squelch quiets
unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM
signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise
is heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which COM transciever is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
APPENDICES
2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM transceiver is selected
on the Audio Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white
indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
AFCS
1
107
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
6
Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM
frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by
the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
7
Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or
8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When
8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in
the complete 3040-channel list.
8
COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
AFCS
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window
on the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
APPENDICES
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD to open the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window. A list of 25 nearest airport
identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Frequency Field.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
108
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select the Nearest Softkey to Open
the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window
Figure 4-4 ‘Nearest Airports’ Window (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
AFCS
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key on either PFD to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
109
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
EIS
Figure 4-5 Nearest Pages Menus
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Information
Press ENT Key to
load frequency
into PFD1 COM
Standby Field.
Cursor then
advances to the
next frequency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select INFO 1
Softkey for AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
Figure 4-6 WPT – Airport Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’, ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’,
and ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or
MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
110
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page of the AUX Page Group.
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Channel Spacing’ Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the ‘COM Configuration’ Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-7 ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV TUNING BOXES
EIS
1
2
4
3
5
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
1
Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which NAV transciever is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
3
Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is selected by pressing the
CDI softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in white indicate that no NAV radio is
selected.
4
NAV Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio standby frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which NAV transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field. Moving the Frequency
Tuning Box is accomplished by pressing the NAV knob on the PFD.
5
VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio,
a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV frequency. In order to
listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID
Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV Tuning Box. To turn on/off both
NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and
pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
6
Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code
station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station
identifier can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing
the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-8 NAV Tuning Box Indications
112
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by selecting the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Selecting the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Selecting the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Selecting the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Selecting the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for tuning,
the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active NAV frequency
color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the previously selected NAV
standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
AFCS
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished
by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
APPENDICES
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
INDEX
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
Figure 4-9 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
APPENDICES
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key on the MFD control unit to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
114
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
AFCS
Press the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Figure 4-11 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
EIS
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency field on approach activation, on both
PFD1 and PFD2.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
AFCS
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of an ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
APPENDICES
GMA 1347
GMA 1360
Figure 4-12 Marker Beacon Keys
INDEX
The Audio Panels provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The MKR/MUTE Key
Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal
116
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon
audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
DME TUNING
EIS
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 NXi for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME
tuning and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 NXi System tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing
with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The ‘DME Tuning’ Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ‘DME Tuning’ Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the ‘DME Tuning’ Window on and off.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DME
Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-13 ‘DME Tuning’ Window
AFCS
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the ‘DME Tuning’ Window.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ‘DME Tuning’ Window.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements (EHS requirements only available with GTX 33ES.)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: Standby,
On, ALT, VFR, Code, Ident, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Code Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Ident, BKSP, Back. The
digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the transponder
code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit.
Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Selecting the Back Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the Back
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the Ident Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
118
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 4-14 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The
Standby, On, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AFCS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-15 Standby Mode
APPENDICES
MANUAL ON MODE
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On-Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
EIS
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-16 On Mode
ALTITUDE MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure altitude information.
The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and
white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable
replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
AFCS
On-Ground ALT Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airborne ALT Mode
Figure 4-17 Altitude Mode
APPENDICES
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
INDEX
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-18 Reply Indication
120
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by selecting the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is selected, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
EIS
Figure 4-19 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the Code Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Press the BKSP
Softkey to move the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the Code Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
IDENT FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Selecting the Ident Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The Ident Softkey
appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the Ident Softkey is selected, a green Ident indication is
displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the Ident Softkey is inoperative.
EIS
After the Ident Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDNT
Indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select the
Ident Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-20 Ident Softkey and Indication
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
center for configuration.
AFCS
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the ‘References’ Window
on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering Flight ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.
Entering a Flight ID:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the ‘References’ Window.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
INDEX
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
122
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panels perform a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off. The exceptions are the speaker and intercom, which are always
selected during power up.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER (GMA 1347)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
SPEAKER (GMA 1360)
AFCS
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR/PA Key selects and deselects the
cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot,
traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PASSENGER ADDRESS MODE (PA MODE)
APPENDICES
Press and hold the SPKR/PA Key for 2 seconds to initiate the Passenger Address Mode. Active PA Mode is
annunciated by the PA Annunciator on the audio panel. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT “Pushto-Talk” button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or both depending on
configuration.
SPLIT-PA MODE
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
During Split-PA Mode the pilot can continue to use the radio(s) while the copilot delivers PA announcements. To initiate Split-PA Mode, first enter Split-COM mode by pressing the COM1 MIC Key and the COM2 MIC
Key simultaneously, then press and hold the SPKR/PA Key for 2 seconds.
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM (GMA 1347)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a six-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
PILOT KEY
COPLT KEY
Annunciator Annunciator
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC
INPUT #1
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, copilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #2
Copilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #1
Copilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #2
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC
INPUT #1
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
OFF
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot; passengers, Copilot
MUSIC INPUT #1
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
MUSIC INPUT #2
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers;
MUSIC INPUT #2
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pilot Hears
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes (GMA 1347)
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
AFCS
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
APPENDICES
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
INDEX
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
124
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
INTERCOM (GMA 1360)
EIS
The GMA 1360 includes an intercom system, two MUSIC inputs, and one telephone/entertainment input for
the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger audio isolation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-21 Intercom Controls
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, and/or the PASS ICS Key to enable intercom audio for the selected
position. If the annunciators are lit, those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit
that position is isolated from the others.
The color of the an ICS annunciation while in an “On” state will be blue if an active Bluetooth connection
is made to a recording device. Otherwise, the “On” state annunciation will be white.
AFCS
INTERCOM MODES
Audio Panel
Copilot Hears
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Passenger Hears
Passenger MIC
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Passenger MIC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
or
APPENDICES
or
Pilot Hears
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Pilot Hears
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Copilot MIC
Copilot Hears
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Pilot MIC
Passenger Hears
Passenger MIC
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Selectd Radios
Aural Alerts
Passenger MIC
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Copilot MIC
Passenger Mic
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Passenger MIC
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Pilot MIC
Passenger MIC
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Copilot MIC
Passenger MIC
Selected Radios
Aural Alerts
Pilot MIC
Passenger MIC
Pilot MIC
Copilot MIC
Passenger MIC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel
Table 4-2 ICS Isolation Modes (GMA 1360)
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The VOL/CRSR Knob controls selection and volume or manual squelch adjustment for audio sources that
may not be adjustable anywhere else in the system. The small knob controls the volume or squelch. Turning
the large knob activates and/or moves the cursor (flashing white annunciator or flashing blue annunciator in
Blue-Select Mode) to select the audio source to adjust. The cursor will time-out after a few seconds and the
position of the cursor will always default back to the CREW Key. Pressing the small knob cancels the cursor.
APPENDICES
Manual Squelch Key
Off for Automatic Squelch,
On for Manual Squelch
Volume Annunciatio
Manual Squelch Annunciator
Off for Automatic Squelch, On for
Manual Squelch
Volume/Squelch Indicator
Indicates volume/squelch setting
relative to full scale
Squelch Annunciatio
VOL/SQ Control Knob
Turn to adjust Squelch when
SQ Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
INDEX
CRSR Control Knob
Turn to move the cursor (flashing
annunciator) to the desired
source
Figure 4-22 Volume/Squelch Control (GMA 1360)
126
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BLUE-SELECT MODE (TELEPHONE/ENTERTAINMENT DISTRIBUTION) (GMA 1360)
The music and telephone (TEL, MUS1, and MUS2) audio are distributed using the Blue-Select Mode. The
following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the telephone audio.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-23 Blue Select Mode (GMA 1360)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor (flashing white
annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob twice. The first press will
cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The annunciator over the TEL Button will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators over the
PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, and PASS ICS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue
annunciator on or off to distribute the telephone audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn the large
knob to select MUS1 or MUS2, and select the crew/passenger positions to receive the music audio.
AFCS
Selecting any button other than PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, PASS ICS, TEL,MUS1, or MUS2 will cancel BlueSelect Mode. Pressing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds with
no input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADJUSTING INTERCOM VOLUME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ADJUSTING SPEAKER VOLUME
When the cursor is on PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, or PASS ICS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom
volume for the listener.
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the selected sources
(COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). Alert volumes are not affected by the speaker volume control knob.
ADJUSTING MKR, MUS1, OR MUS2 VOLUME
EIS
When the cursor is on MKR, MUS1, or MUS2 the Volume Control Knob adjusts the individual volume of
the selected source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADJUSTING MANUAL SQUELCH
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold (the volume
level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3D AUDIO (GMA 1360)
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear, 3D
audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat position.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom
and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still hear all audio
sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock
position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position. All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the system
assumes the pilot sits in the left seat. A Garmin authorized service center can make changes to the default
configuration.
128
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENABLING 3D AUDIO
3D Audio Troubleshooting
Cause(s)
Solution(s)
Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stereo headset in use with
2)
mono/stereo switch set to
‘mono’
Aircraft wiring has left audio 3)
wired to both left and right
channels of stereo headset jack
AFCS
Symptom(s)
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears.
2)
Or:
“3D audio right” message
not heard
3)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions. When
3D Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D audio right” in
the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear respectively, the cause
may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a headset or aircraft wiring problem
is suspected.
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears,
2)
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
both ears
3)
3D Audio Troubleshooting
Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
Stereo headset in use with
mono/stereo switch set to
mono
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right shorted together)
2)
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
3)
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
Verify correct orientation from the left/right indication
on each side of the headset or the position of the
boom mic (usually attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards left/right position information
will be swapped.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in both ears. “3D
audio left” not heard
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in right ear only
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
left ear only
2)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1)
channel used for mono instead
of left or left/right swapped)
Stereo headset is on backwards 1)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right channels swapped)
2)
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in left ear only, no
audio heard in right ear.
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in right ear only, no
audio heard in left ear
Aircraft wired for mono
intercom
1)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1)
channel used for mono instead
of left, or left/right swapped)
See a service center to wire the installation for stereo
headsets.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
AFCS
Table 4-3 3D Audio Troubleshooting
BLUETOOTH® (GMA 1360 ONLY)
NOTE: Pairing is only necessary during the first attempt to connect a Bluetooth device to the audio panel.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Once paired, the audio panel and the device will connect automatically.
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH DEVICE WITH THE AUDIO PANEL
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press and hold the inner knob for two seconds. The Bluetooth Annunciator flashes to indicate the unit
is discoverable and the aural message “Bluetooth discoverable” is heard. The audio panel will remain
discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once paired, the Bluetooth Annunciator
turns steady blue and the aural message “Bluetooth paired” is heard.
130
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ASSIGNING AN AUDIO SOURCE TO THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the TEL, MUS1, or MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue (the audio from the Bluetooth source
will not be heard until this step is complete). The key annunciator cycles OFF-WHITE-BLUE. WHITE
selects the wired audio source. BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. The BLUE source assignment will
persist through Bluetooth audio connection disruptions.
NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is
assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
EIS
Bluetooth audio will maintain a separate volume level and Blue Select distribution from the wired audio
source. If the Bluetooth connection is supporting a phone call, all intercom positions listening to that source
can also speak on the call through the headset MICs. AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADDITIONAL BLUETOOTH CONTROL FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the Audio Panel detects a recording device as the Bluetooth connected device, the Pilot ICS
Annunciator will turn blue. All audio heard by the Pilot will be recorded. Press and hold the PILOT ICS Key
to enable/disable Bluetooth recording mode.
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
NOTE: Pressing the play key on the pilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Pilot. Pressing the play
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
key on the Copilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Copilot.
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that continually records up to 2.5 minutes of the
selected COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of
recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from
the oldest block.
AFCS
The PLAY Key controls the play function. The PLAY annunciator remains lit to indicate when play is in
progress. The PLAY annunciator turns off after playback is finished.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block and then returns to normal operation.
Pressing the PLAY Key again during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
APPENDICES
Pressing the PLAY Key twice within one-half second while audio is playing plays the previous block of
recorded audio. Each subsequent two presses of the PLAY Key within one-half second backtracks through the
recorded memory blocks to reach and play any recorded block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
MUSIC INPUT #1 and MUSIC INPUT #2 cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for
MUSIC INPUT #1 and MUSIC INPUT #2 can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE:
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC INPUT #1 and MUSIC INPUT #2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as cell phones, and tablets. Two
3.5-mm stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs
of the entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC INPUT #1 or MUSIC INPUT #2 jacks.
EIS
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input MUSIC INPUT #1.
MUSIC INPUT #1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MUSIC INPUT #1 can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT Annunciators
are extinguished. MUSIC INPUT #1 can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated
and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MUSIC INPUT #1 Muting
MUSIC INPUT #1 muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. MUSIC
INPUT #1 is always soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual
return of MUSIC INPUT #1 to its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC INPUT #1 volume
to return to normal is between one-half and four seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MUSIC INPUT #1 Muting Enable/Disable
AFCS
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches MUSIC INPUT #1 muting on and
off. When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled,
two beeps indicate music muting is disabled. MUSIC INPUT #1 muting is reset (enabled) during power
up.
MUSIC INPUT #2
MUSIC INPUT #2 can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
APPENDICES
SiriusXM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to SiriusXM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
INDEX
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC INPUT #1 or MUSIC INPUT #2 jacks removes the SiriusXM
Radio Audio from that input. For example, if passengers prefer their own music while the pilot listens to the
SiriusXM Radio, the entertainment audio should be connected to the MUSIC INPUT #2 jack.
132
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.6 AUDIO PANELS PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to ensure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs or Volume/Squelch Knob clockwise two full turns. This sets the intercom level
to max volume (least amount of attenuation).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knobs or Volume/Squelch Knob to set the volume to the desired intercom level.
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the system includes equipment failures of the system components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck
microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REVERSIONARY MODE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
134
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
EIS
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. Detailed descriptions of GPS navigation functions are discussed later in this
section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels are
only available with SBAS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map and HSI Map are small versions of the Navigation Map. The Inset Map is displayed in the lower
left corner of the PFD (lower right during reversionary mode), and the HSI Map is displayed in the center of
the HSI. The Inset Map and the HSI Map may each be referred to as the PFD Map. A PFD Map is displayed by
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing either the Inset Map or HSI Map
Softkey. Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the PFD Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the Inset Map can be reduced by pressing the Map/
HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the Navigation Map
can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented three different
ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Current Track Indicator
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Inset Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Mode
Current Track
Indicator
AFCS
HSI Map
Figure 5-2
GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map
Navigation Data Bar
Active Page
Display Title
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Orientation
Navigation Map
APPENDICES
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
INDEX
Flight Plan Leg
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
136
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1 minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status box are:
Description
Symbol
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Leg
EIS
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Right Holding Pattern
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
BRG Bearing
FOD Fuel over Destination
DIS Distance
GS Ground Speed
DTK Desired Track
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
END Endurance
TAS True Airspeed
ENR ETE to Final Destination
TKE Track Angle Error
ESA Enroute Safe Altitude
TRK Track
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
VSR Vertical Speed Required
ETE Estimated Time Enroute
XTK Cross-Track Error
FOB Fuel on Board
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
APPENDICES
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Obstacle data
• Topography scale
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
• Topography data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (‘Map’)
• All Nearest Group Pages (‘NRST’)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (‘WPT’)
• Direct To Window
• ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page (‘Aux’)
• PFD Maps
• Flight Plan Pages (‘FPL’)
• Procedure Loading Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
• North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
APPENDICES
• Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
The Auto North Up setting configures the map to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the
map range reaches a minimum range.
INDEX
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
138
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. Any other displays that
show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Settings
Selection
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu
Map Group Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Orientation Field
North Up Above Field
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu - Map Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
APPENDICES
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key
5) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ Field.
EIS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. When the map range
is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map, a magnifying
glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise
to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Auto Zoom On
APPENDICES
Figure 5-9 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
INDEX
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on ‘Map Settings’ Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map
range clearly showing the potential impact areas. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any navigation map
140
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
EIS
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/ minimum times can be
adjusted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the Map Group) determines how long
auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range
available (1000 nm).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ On/Off Field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS
Knob.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection
Field.
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ Field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Pointer
Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map Pointer
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
INDEX
APPENDICES
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
142
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Information about Point
of Interest
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Map Pointer on
POI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level
(MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
AFCS
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer and place the
Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page for the selected waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page and
return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page showing the selected waypoint.
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on the boundary of an airspace.
APPENDICES
2) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and center the map on the aircraft.
Or:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
INDEX
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page Menu
and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement Line
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
APPENDICES
TOPOGRAPHY
INDEX
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map.
144
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures. Topographic
data can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the navigation map. In addition, the
Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the map) showing a
scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
EIS
Topographic Data
on VSD Inset
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO Off
TOPO On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Absolute Terrain On
Terrain Off
AFCS
Figure 5-14 PFD Inset Map - Absolute Terrain Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - Topo Scale
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
145
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Inset Map or the HSI Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey .
EIS
2) Press the Topo Softkey.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying/removing topographic data using the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ ‘Page Menu’ Window:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
APPENDICES
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
146
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP SYMBOLS
EIS
This section discusses the types of land, aviation, and airspace symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type
of symbol can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering
of the symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
Land Symbols
Symbol
User Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
25
40
50
400
US Highway (National Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local Highway)
2.5
100
4
25
Railroads
7.5
25
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (> 50,000)
Small City (> 5,000)
50
25
400
100
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
1
1000
Local Road (Local Road)
N/A
APPENDICES
International Highway (Freeway)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
400
AFCS
50
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Interstate Highway (Freeway)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Highways and Roads
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
EIS
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft, or
Longest Runway < 5000 ft with control tower)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft without a control
tower)
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
50
400
25
150
1.5
5
7.5
150
N/A
25
N/A
40
Non-directional Beacon (NDB)
25
50
VOR
50
250
N/A
N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
25
1000
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
250
1000
VNAV Constraints
1000
1000
See Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway Extension
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Missed Approach Preview On/Off (Missed APPR)
Intersection (INT)
VOR Compass Rose On/Off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
100
1000
N/A
N/A
AFCS
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
*
*
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
*
*
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling)
*
*
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
50
150
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspace Symbols
148
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Symbol
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airspace Symbols
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
100
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
10
100
Alert/Prohibited/Restricted/Warning Areas (RESTRICTED)
50
100
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
50
250
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
50
250
EIS
50
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* Label placement and range is determined by the system for best display and minimal clutter
Table 5-3 Airspace Symbol Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
APPENDICES
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP DECLUTTER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following table lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Item
Detail 3
Detail 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
VRPs
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/CTA
Class A/D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Detail 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 5-4 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
Decluttering the MFD navigation map:
APPENDICES
Press the Detail Softkey with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown.
With each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed.
INDEX
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key to apply the next declutter level and return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
150
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Decluttering the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
AIRWAYS
EIS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
AFCS
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
selections, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also
be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airways Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes)
50
100
Table 5-5 Airways Symbol Information
EIS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (‘AWY LO’).
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (‘AWY HI’).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (‘AWY Off’).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or the ‘High ALT Airways’ On/Off Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range field.
APPENDICES
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
152
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. Selected Altitude Intercept Arc, Track
Vector, Wind Vector, Fuel Range Ring, and SVT Field of View) can be displayed/removed individually.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Hazard Avoidance Section for information on displaying obstacles (Point Obstacle, Wire Obstacle) on
the map.
TRACK VECTOR
EIS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track
vector is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is
selectable (30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track
vector. The track vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always
a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Track Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map -Track Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected
altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Intercept Arc
APPENDICES
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WIND VECTOR ON MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the MFD. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater
than or equal to 1 kt.
.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
EIS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
FUEL RANGE RING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Total Endurance Range
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
154
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This
is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Field of View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting up additional ‘Map’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Or:
AFCS
If it is a data field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on auto-tuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As
a waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the system scrolls through the database, displaying
those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the
selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the ¯ Key on any of the waypoint pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
Facility Entry Field
City Entry Field
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
Waypoint Identifier Symbol
Entered Waypoint on Map
Waypoint Location
Figure 5-22 Waypoint Information Window
AFCS
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a ‘Duplicate Waypoints’ Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Identifier with
Duplicates
INDEX
Duplicate
Waypoints
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-23 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
156
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRPORTS
AIRPORT INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs
to be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the ‘WPT - Airport
Information’ Page Map.
EIS
The ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport
information, load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures
that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on
loading frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page defaults to the
airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport.
On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the ‘WPT - Airport
Information’ Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’. For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on
the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page by pressing the Info Softkey until ‘Info 1’ is displayed.
Airport Information
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
AFCS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Airport/Runway
Diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-24 Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
INDEX
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-25 Airport Directory Page Example
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The airport directory information is viewed on the ‘WPT - Airport Directory’ Page by pressing the Info
Softkey until 2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on
the ‘WPT - Airport Directory’ Page:
Airport: Identifier, Type, Name,
City, State, Map
Facility Lighting and Beacon:
Hours operating, Type and Location,
CTAF, beacon colors
Control Tower: Full/Part-time
Hours, Days Open
Noise Abatement: Flying
Procedures
Attendance: Annual, weekly, daily,
hours
Pattern Altitudes: Aircraft Class/
Altitude
Runways: Headings, Length,
Width, Facility Obstructions, Surface,
Condition, Clearance Slope
FBO: Name/Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards,
Phone/Fax, Hours Internet, Courtesy
Car
Weather Contacts: Service Type
and Frequencies/Phone (AWOS/
ASOS)
Approaches: Types
Aircraft Businesses/Clubs:
Name, Type (sales, training,
servicing), Frequencies/Phone/Fax,
Credit Cards, Internet, Services
Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Frequencies: Type/Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
158
Special Operations at Airport:
Helicopters, etc.
Restaurants: On the Field and
Nearby
Attractions: Hotels, Museums,
Raceways, Golfing, etc.
NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
Elevation: Airfield Elev (ft)
Mag Var: Airfield Mag Var
(degrees)
General Information and/or
Notes: Fees, Airport Notes, local
area information
Transportation: Taxi Services, Car
Rentals, Type and Availability (public,
shuttle, limo, etc.)
Charts: VFR Sectional
Airport Manager: Phone
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The ‘Frequencies’ Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
FSS
Terminal *
AWOS
Gate
TMA *
Center
Ground
Tower
Class B *
Helicopter
TRSA *
Class C *
Multicom
Unicom
Clearance
Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-6 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
See the Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for
display (see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey), press the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location within the ‘Airport’ Box.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
AFCS
1) With the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
APPENDICES
From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination
Airport’. The Destination Airport is displayed.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NEAREST AIRPORT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The ‘Nearest Airports’ Window displays a list of
up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they
are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
EIS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
Nearest Softkey
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-26 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
AFCS
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD ‘Airport Information’ Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
Airport Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
APPENDICES
- Lat/Long
INDEX
Figure 5-27 Airport Information Window on PFD
160
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the ‘Airport Information’
Window.
3) To return to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘Back’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window and the ‘Airport Information’
Window.)
EIS
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential
use in the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport
and surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’,
‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’, and ‘Approaches’. FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation
map from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to seven
frequencies, and up to eight approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list
can be scrolled. If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The
currently selected airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Airport Information
Nearest Airport
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
APPENDICES
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection
Softkeys
Figure 5-28 Nearest Airport Page
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ Page Group.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may
already be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list
is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight
‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ‘Nearest Airports’ Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page defines the minimum runway length and
surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’
Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways
or runways that are not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or
meters) for runway length and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Runway Surface’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/ Soft).
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
162
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NON-AIRPORT WAYPOINTS
WAYPOINT INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Airport Waypoints are considered to be Intersections, VORs, NDBs, VRPs, and User Waypoints. For
each of these waypoints, their respective information pages will show a map of the currently selected waypoint,
the waypoint identifier, and location. Additionally, intersections will show the nearest VOR while both the
VOR and NDB waypoints will show their frequency and the nearest airport. User Waypoint information also
provides the waypoint type (radial/radial, radial/DME, or latitude/longitude), temporary status, comments,
and a User Waypoint list.
EIS
The ‘VOR Information’ Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly tune a VOR or ILS frequency. If a VOR station is combined
with a TACAN station it is listed as a VOR-TACAN on the ‘VOR Information’ Page and if it includes only DME,
it is displayed as VOR-DME. Also, the VOR class (Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal) will be shown
in the VOR ‘Information’ Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Inset Map, ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position
on the map using the Joystick, or from the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page by referencing a bearing/
distance from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once
a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased
upon system power down.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the ‘WPT - Intersection Information’ Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily
the VOR used to define the intersection.
Intersection Identifier
AFCS
Intersection Info
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
APPENDICES
Selected Waypoint:
Intersection
(as seen here)
NDB
VOR
VRP, or
User Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 5-29 Non-Airport Waypoint Information Page (Intersection Example)
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDB Identifier/Type
VOR Identifier/Type
NDB Information
VOR Information
NDB Frequency
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Nearest Airport Info
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
EIS
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Waypoint Info
VRP Identifier/Symbol
- VRP Name
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
VRP Information
User Wpt Comment
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
User Waypoint List
- Identifier/ Comment
Figure 5-30 Non-Airport Waypoint Information Pages (NDB, VOR, VRP, and User Waypoint)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing Non-Airport Waypoints:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT - Intersection, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User WPT Information’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to display the flashing cursor in the ‘Intersection, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User Waypoint’ Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
5) Press the ENT Key, if needed.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NEAREST NON-AIRPORT WAYPOINTS
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Nearest pages can be used to quickly find waypoints close to the aircraft. The system will display
a scrollable list of up to 25 nearest waypoints with bearing and distance from the aircraft, a map of the
surrounding area, and additional information particular to the type of waypoint chosen. A white arrow before
the waypoint identifier/name indicates the currently selected waypoint shown on the map, with its associated
information in the lower box or boxes:
164
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
- The ‘NRST - Nearest Intersection’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and a
‘Reference VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- The ‘NRST - Nearest NDB’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’. The NDB ‘Information’ Box will show a Compass Locator if the NDB is associated with either a Locator
Outer Marker (LOM) or Locator Middle Marker (LMM).
- The ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’. The NAV frequency from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page via the
FREQ Softkey. See the Audio & CNS Section for more information.
EIS
- The ‘NRST - Nearest VRP’ Page will show two boxes labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. Information
will contain the VRP Name, Country and latitude/longitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- The ‘NRST - Nearest User WPTS’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest User’, ‘Information’, and
‘Reference Waypoints’. Information will include any Comments and the latitude/longitude. The ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box will provide a reference NAVAID with a radial/DME that coincides with the User Waypoint.
The nearest waypoint list will only include waypoints within 200nm. If there are no waypoints in the list,
text indicating that there are no nearest waypoints will be displayed, and the information and frequency fields
(if applicable) will be dashed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Intersections
- White arrow indicates
the selected waypoint
shown.
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Showing Nearest
Intersection
Nearest Non-Airport
Waypoint:
AFCS
Intersection NDB VOR VRP User Waypoint -
Intersection Info
- Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Figure 5-31 Nearest Intersection Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
- VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- NDB Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to NDB
from aircraft position
NDB Information
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
VOR Frequency
Nearest VRP
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- VRP Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
VRP Information
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
APPENDICES
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
INDEX
Figure 5-32 Nearest Non-Airport Waypoints (NDB, VOR, VRP, and User WPTS)
166
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing Nearest Non-Airport Waypoints:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Intersections, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User WPTS’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to display the flashing cursor in the ‘Nearest INT, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User’ Box,
Or:
If the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page is displayed, to display the flashing cursor:
Press the VOR Softkey.
EIS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key
b) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) If needed, press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob as needed to select an identifier.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
User waypoints can be created from the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page:
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AFCS
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
INDEX
Or:
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page is displayed with the captured position.
AFCS
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
APPENDICES
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
INDEX
Or:
168
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
EIS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Once a user waypoint has been created, it may be edited, renamed, or deleted. A system generated
comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing, and distance. If a
system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the ‘WPT — User Waypoint
Information’ ‘Page Menu’ Window. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power
cycle.
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘YES’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Or:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
170
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B, TMA, and Airways surrounding TMA, Class C
and CTA, Class A, Class D, Restricted (Prohibited), MOA (Military), and other airspace provided by the navigation
database. Some examples of typical airspaces are depicted below. See Table 5-3 for the maximum ranges for
each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area. Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) are
discussed in the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class D Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Alert Area
(Other)
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MOA (Military)
APPENDICES
ADIZ
(Other)
Warning Area
(Other)
INDEX
Figure 5-33 Airspaces
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying and removing airspace altitude labels:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace’ Group, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace ALT LBL’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ to display labels and ‘Off’ to remove labels.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
NEAREST AIRSPACE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SETTING AIRSPACE ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box (‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page) on the MFD allows the pilot to turn the controlled/
special-use airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the ‘NRST - Nearest
Airspaces ‘ Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. It simply turns
on/off the message provided in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
Pressing the PFD Alerts/Message Softkey displays the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. The following airspace
alerts may be displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less than
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
AFCS
Table 5-7 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected
to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
172
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
VIEWING NEAREST AIRSPACE INFORMATION
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In
addition, a selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’
Page. In addition to displaying a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the ‘NRST - Nearest
Airspaces’ Page displays airspace information in four boxes labelled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’,
‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’. Nearest Airspace
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’
Page. The Alerts and FREQ Softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is available
only if one or more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Airspace Alerts Info
Inside of Airspace
Airspace within 2nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
AFCS
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Figure 5-34 Nearest Airspaces Page
APPENDICES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Alerts Softkey on the MFD; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts
Window’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
INDEX
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SMART AIRSPACE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The
function does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the
airspace. If the current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace
boundary is shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of
the airspace, the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Smart Airspace Off
Figure 5-35 Smart Airspace
Smart Airspace On
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The ’Map Settings’ Window is displayed
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
174
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the ¯ Key on either the MFD Controller or the
PFD, is quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The ‘Direct To’ Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The ‘Direct To’ Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Course
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Figure 5-36 Direct To Window - MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Direct-to Point Info
APPENDICES
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
INDEX
Activation Command
Figure 5-37 Direct To Window - PFD
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the ‘Direct To’ Window. Also, any waypoint
contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the ‘Direct To’ Window, the ‘FPL Active Flight Plan’ Page, or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: In some cases, Origin and Destination airports may not be displayed in the PFD “Flight Plan” or
“Recent” submenu or the MFD ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page until the airport waypoint is loaded into
the flight plan.
Waypoint Submenu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-38 Waypoint Submenu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
The ‘Direct To’ Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to
navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active
flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page
defaults to the displayed waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the ‘CRS’ or ‘Course’ Field on the ‘Direct To’ Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the active
flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (turning the knob counterclockwise displays the waypoint submenu window).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
176
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on PFD), and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired waypoint.
3) Press the ¯ Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the default
selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display the waypoint submenu window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
AFCS
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports ‘Page on
the MFD and press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the ¯ Key.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘CRS’ or ‘Course’ Field.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
EIS
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. If no
airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is
automatically created at the location of the map arrow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, VRP, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
178
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the altitude field (‘VNV’ or ‘ALT’).
3) Enter the desired altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
5) The cursor is now flashing in offset distance field.
6) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
Heading Leg
Roll Steering Path †
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
AFCS
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering path. When a future roll
steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll steering path.
Table 5-8 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. Upon power up, the
previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft position is at the origin airport
and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not within 5 nm of the airport origin, on the ground,
or if more than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification, the previously active flight plan
is not retained. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight
plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
180
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
EIS
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active FPL Waypoint List
AFCS
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Active Flight
Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
APPENDICES
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-39 Active Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan
Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-40 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-41 Flight Plan Catalog Page
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
INDEX
APPENDICES
Auto-designation will determine the most likely airport of origin and auto-populate the Active Flight Plan.
Once determined, the airfield identifier automatically appears in the ‘Origin’ Field and the line immediately below
‘Origin’ while keeping the runway (‘RW’) Field empty. The line below the Origin line serves as the first point in
the flight plan.
182
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-designation occurs between 15 and 60 seconds after display power-up under the following conditions:
• Aircraft position is known
• Aircraft is on the ground
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Nearest airport is within 200NM
• Flight plan is empty
If the pilot manually enters the origin, or any other leg of the flight plan before auto-designation occurs, nothing
gets inserted automatically. The automatic insertion logic only runs once, so the pilot can edit the origin if the
nearest airport is not the desired origin.
EIS
If the pilot enters a different airport into the first point of the flight plan, the Origin will change to this entry,
and the pilot will be prompted to enter the departure runway.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Both the Origin airport/runway and the first point of the flight plan will be the same unless a departure is
entered and a manual leg is inserted at the beginning of the loaded departure. Loading a departure locks in the
origin information.
NOTE: In some cases, Origin and Destination airports may not be displayed in the PFD“Flight Plan” or
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Recent” submenu or the MFD ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page until the airport waypoint is loaded into
the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight plan information can be viewed in different locations and formats. The ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page
format can be modified in several ways; flight plan profile information can be viewed on the Navigation Map
VSD Inset; and the MFD Split Screen feature can provide different display configurations of the flight plan,
navigation map and charts.
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
AFCS
The ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page can be configured to show cumulative distance over the length of the
flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan; and it can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the
wide view, additional information is displayed: Fuel Remaining (Fuel REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE),
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the flight plan view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
APPENDICES
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or press the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys..
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SPLIT SCREEN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Charts may be viewed alongside the active flight plan in split screen mode. With an active flight plan loaded
into the system, the charts page will automatically display a chart coinciding with the active flight plan leg.
For more information on Charts, see the Additional Features Section.
EIS
Pressing the Charts Softkey from the ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page will remove the active flight plan map to
display a Charts Pane alongside the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Pane. The Active Page Title will change to ‘FPL - Chart
+ Active Flight Plan’. The active flight plan map can be re-displayed. However, displaying the map in split
screen on the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Pane limits the flight plan content which can be displayed. For example,
displaying the Flight Plan Map while in split screen narrow view removes the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box. See
the following figures depicting the different split screen displays with the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display Title shows ‘Chart + Active Flight Plan’
Split Screen Narrow View
Split Screen Wide View
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-42 Split Screen Mode Narrow and Wide View
184
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Split Screen Narrow View with Flight Plan Map
Split Screen Wide View with Flight Plan Map
Figure 5-43 Split Screen Mode with Flight Plan Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing charts and ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page in split screen mode:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Charts Softkey. If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN Softkey to disable
full screen mode. Split screen mode is now enabled showing two display panes. The Chart Pane is highlighted
by a cyan box indicating it is the active pane.
3) To quickly view the chart corresponding to the active flight plan leg, press the Sync Softkey.
Displaying the flight plan map on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page in split screen mode:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
AFCS
2) If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN Softkey to disable full screen mode. Split
screen mode is now enabled showing two display panes. The Chart Pane is highlighted by a cyan box indicating
it is the active pane.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Move the Joystick to select the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Pane as the active display pane.
4) Press the MENU Key. ‘Show Flight Plan Map’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the Flight Plan Map, press the MENU Key and select ‘Hide Flight Plan Map’. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The active flight plan is listed on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, and in the ‘Flight Plan’
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown on
the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
EIS
The following procedure is intended to provide an overview of basic flight plan creation. It will create a flight
plan from the origin runway to the destination runway, and includes enroute waypoint selection. The following
procedure does not include airways or terminal procedures. For instructions on how to add airways to a flight
plan, see the Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications discussion later in this Flight Planning Section.
For information on departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches see the Procedures Section.
Creating an active flight plan:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key. Press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on PFD).
2) If the system correctly auto-designated (populated) the Origin, proceed to Step 3.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select the origin airport and runway as follows:
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the origin
waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
3) Select the destination airport and runway by highlighting the field below the Destination header and completing
steps 2b - 2e.
AFCS
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item).
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
APPENDICES
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove to deactivate the cursor.
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
186
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
c)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the origin
waypoint.
Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway.
e) Press the ENT Key to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
EIS
5) Select the destination airport and runway by highlighting the field below the Destination header and completing
steps 4b - 4e.
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Press the ENT Key. The stored flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT AND AIRWAY MODIFICATIONS
Active and stored flight plans can be edited at any time. Waypoints and airways can be added, modified, or
removed from any flight plan. Edits made to an active flight plan affect navigation as soon as they are entered.
Modifications to flight planned departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches are discussed later in
the Procedures portion of Flight Management.
AFCS
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select
the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight
plans are limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of
waypoints in the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.”
appears and the new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Adding Waypoints
APPENDICES
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap in the flight
plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the distance across the gap.
INDEX
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window has duplicates, a ‘Duplicate Waypoint’
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the flight plan is successfully edited in the ‘Flight Plan’ Window from PFD while the MFD ‘FPL - Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan’ Page is in the process of being edited, the ‘Flight Plan Modified By Other User’ Window will appear
on the MFD. Press the ENT key to return to the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page with the accepted changes.
EIS
Origin Header
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enroute Header
Enroute Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Destination Header
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-44 Active Flight Plan Waypoints
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
AFCS
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
APPENDICES
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan using the map pointer:
1) Press the FPL Key
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob on the MFD to activate the cursor.
188
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
4) Push the Joystick on the MFD to activate the panning function on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page and pan
to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user waypoint
is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the active flight plan.
Adding a waypoint to an existing stored flight plan:
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Removing Waypoints
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Individual waypoints can be removed from a flight plan. Some waypoints in the final approach segment
(such as the FAF or MAP) can not be removed individually. Attempting to remove a waypoint that is not
allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification’.
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the end waypoint of
the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and activated.
AFCS
Removing an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be removed.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be removed.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Fly-Over Waypoint Designation
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Waypoints entered in the enroute segment of the flight plan may be treated as fly-by waypoints, unless
otherwise designated. A fly-by waypoint is a waypoint that marks the intersection of two straight paths,
with the transition from one path to another being made by the aircraft using a precisely calculated turn
that “flies by” but does not vertically cross the waypoint. A fly-over waypoint is a waypoint that must be
crossed vertically by the aircraft.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enroute Segment
- TOP as Fly-By Waypoint
INDEX
Figure 5-45 TOP Fly-By Waypoint
190
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
EIS
Enroute Segment
- TOP as Fly-Over
Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
Figure 5-46 TOP Fly-Over Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Designating a fly-over waypoint:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key and press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For a stored flight plan, highlight the desired flight plan on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page’ and press the
Edit Softkey.
2) Highlight the desired waypoint.
AFCS
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Fly-Over Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set <waypoint> to be a
fly-over waypoint?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) To change the waypoint back to a fly-by waypoint, highlight the desired waypoint. Press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Set Fly-By Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set <waypoint> to be a fly-by waypoint?’ Window
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN AIRWAYS
APPENDICES
Within flight plans, airways can be added, removed and collapsed/expanded.
Adding Airways
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Airways can be added to any flight plan. An airway can only be added if there is an existing entry waypoint
in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure. The
system anticipates the desired airway based on the selected waypoint and the flight plan.
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airway
Airways Available
at TOP
Preview of
Selected Airway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-47 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Airway Exit Points
Available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Airway Exit
Point
APPENDICES
Figure 5-48 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Adding an airway to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor below the airway entry waypoint for the insertion point. If there
is no valid airway entry waypoint in the flight plan, one must be entered first.
192
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob for the MFD one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU
Key for the and select “Load Airway”(PFD or MFD). The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu item is
available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has already been entered in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways
are shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Adding an airway to a stored flight plan:
EIS
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight “EDIT” and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor below the airway entry waypoint for the insertion point. If there
is no valid airway entry waypoint in the flight plan, one must be entered first.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey (MFD only), or press the MENU
Key and select “Load Airway”. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu item is available only when
a valid airway entry waypoint has already been entered in the flight plan.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways
are shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a
directional restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
AFCS
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the
list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another
waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the
flight plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
APPENDICES
Removing Airways
Removing an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the airway to be removed.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
EIS
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be removed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Collapsing Airways
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded. When airways have
been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value
is inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The active flight plan will always keep the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a
collapsed airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is
automatically expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight
plan review.
All Airways
Collapsed View
INDEX
APPENDICES
V4.SLN Airway
Expanded View
Figure 5-49 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
194
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
FLIGHT PLAN OPERATIONS
This section will discuss activating a flight plan leg and conducting enroute operations such as creating an
along track offset, parallel track, closest point from a reference point and user defined holding. For information
on departures, arrivals, and approaches refer to the Procedures portion later in the Flight Management Section.
EIS
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The flight plan leg which is currently being used for navigation guidance is referred to as the ‘active leg’. The system automatically sequences from one active leg to the next as defined by the active flight plan.
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the end waypoint for the desired leg.
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
AFCS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight
plan. Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the
system reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances
can be entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along
track offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results
in an along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an
along track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at
or after the final approach fix of an approach.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be removed and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
195
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-50 Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
PARALLEL TRACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Parallel Track feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the current
flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier. Activation of parallel track will
apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not meet the criteria for parallel
track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning of that leg.
APPENDICES
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled.
The following will inhibit activation of a parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to, to the selected waypoint.
INDEX
• If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with
the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’.
196
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp turn of
more than 120 degrees), the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because
of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status indicates that
the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the active leg type
(‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’).
If there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. The following will
cancel the parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to, to a waypoint.
EIS
• Initiating a hold at the present position.
• If a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• No legs are remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. Initiating a hold at
a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is required to fly to the hold
waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the parallel track will be resumed.
Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be resumed upon exiting the hold.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Parallel Track
Waypoints
Original Track
AFCS
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-51 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Parallel Track’ is
highlighted.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference waypoint,
and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the Active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user waypoint
at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint.
198
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Hold Course
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
INDEX
Figure 5-52 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
199
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Course
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode
Button
(Time or Distance)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further
Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection
INDEX
Figure 5-53 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
200
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears
with the course field highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
1) Press a ¯ Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’ instead of ‘Activate?’ when
finished.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, ‘HOLD’ is inserted into the
active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
‘HOLD’ in the flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AFCS
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
APPENDICES
MANAGING FLIGHT PLANS
INDEX
The pilot can manage flight plans by importing/exporting via SD Card or mobile device, and by storing,
copying, inverting, and deleting. Also, the comment field (name) of each flight plan can be changed to
something that is useful for identification and sorting.
202
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING FLIGHT PLANS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Bluetooth Transceiver. Transfer of a flight
plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device. When a mobile device is attempting to transfer a
flight plan to the system, the pending flight plan may be ignored, previewed, stored, or activated by the pilot.
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Store Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Delete Softkey
Activate Softkey
Figure 5-54 Preview Flight Plan Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
AFCS
Pending Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
APPENDICES
Preview Softkey
Ignore Softkey
Figure 5-55 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Ignoring a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a ‘PENDING FLIGHT PLAN’ pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page title.
Or:
Press the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan
will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
EIS
Previewing a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a ‘PENDING FLIGHT PLAN’ pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page title.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the Preview Softkey to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Storing a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
204
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
4) Press the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan becomes
the active flight plan and is removed from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
AFCS
5) Press the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan is removed
from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting all pending flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
6)
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Alternatively, flight plans may be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the ‘FPL Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear when a flight plan is imported or exported.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No
stored flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
AFCS
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
APPENDICES
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
INDEX
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
stored in the system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
One or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can
support. The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system
cannot find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but
must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
system before it can be activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to
naming conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card
may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
Table 5-9 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
206
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:
EIS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
AFCS
Exporting a flight plan to an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
APPENDICES
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INVERTING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point. Inverting and
activating stored flight plans is discussed wthin the Stored Flight Plan Functions portion of this section.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
3) Highlight ‘OK’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. Additionally, the system allows
the pilot to delete the active flight plan, which suspends navigation by the system.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the Active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
STORED FLIGHT PLAN FUNCTIONS
AFCS
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. Details about each stored flight plan
can be viewed on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and on the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A stored flight plan may be viewed or edited. The system also allows copying a flight plan into a new
flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to
duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
INDEX
APPENDICES
Lastly, individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
208
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Stored Flight Plan Selected
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-56 Stored Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) Information is displayed in the ‘Flight Plan Info’ Box showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute
safe altitude information for the selected Flight Plan.
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
AFCS
Storing an active flight plan from the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan to another flight plan memory slot, on the MFD:
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan #?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
210
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
CHANGING A FLIGHT PLAN COMMENT (NAME)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the comment field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
AFCS
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EIS
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and terminal
phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to
waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear
deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical navigation is available for flight control operations when valid VNV data is entered in flight plan, and
the ENBL VNV Softkey is pressed (softkey label changes to ‘Cncl VNV’ once enabled) on the ‘FPL - Active Flight
Plan’ Page. Refer to the AFCS Section for more information on activating the flight director and using the vertical
navigation mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV ¯ Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the ¯ Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass flight plan
waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent (TOD)
point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached
AFCS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
212
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
.
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Disabled (fields dashed)
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cncl VNV Softkey
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-57 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL- Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., FALUR)).
AFCS
3) To Disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and
press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
APPENDICES
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
3) Press the VNV ¯ Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key. An
‘Activate vertical ¯ to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
EIS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically provides descending vertical speed and deviation guidance to an altitude(s) chosen by the system
for any waypoint prior to the FAF. These altitudes are displayed as cyan text. Additionally, altitudes can be
manually designated prior to the FAF. The FAF can be manually designated if the selected approach provides no
vertical guidance (i.e. glidepath). Manually designated altitudes are displayed as cyan text. For all designated
altitudes, the system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the designated altitude, which are
displayed as white text.
AFCS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively overriding
the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT
or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical profile.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference (white text). It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other
displayed altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing
an altitude to a non-designated altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the manually designated altitude, which
are displayed as white text. System calculated altitudes can also be manually designated. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a designated altitude.
214
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Calculated Altitude
(White Text)
Edited Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text with Pencil Icon)
Designated Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text)
Cross AT 2,300 ft
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
EIS
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Temperature
Compensated
Figure 5-58 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
White Text
Cyan Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5OOOFT
Altitude calculated by the system estimating the altitude of
the aircraft as it passes over the navigation point. No white
line above or below to indicate a potential constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system cannot use this altitude in determining vertical
guidance because of an invalid constraint condition.
AFCS
Altitude retrieved from the navigation database. White line
above or below indicates the type of constraint,
as shown in the preceding figure.
These altitudes are provided as a reference, and are not
designated to be used in determining vertical guidance.
Altitude is designated for use in determining vertical
guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual designation or
manually edited data entry.
Table 5-10 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: All designated altitudes (cyan text) will be displayed in the active flight plan without restriction bars
regardless of what is shown on the published procedure.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
APPENDICES
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS SBAS approach)
INDEX
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event an
altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint,
the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be provided.
The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been edited.
Manually designating or editing a waypoint altitude constraint to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
EIS
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
Removing an altitude constraint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
AFCS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
INDEX
APPENDICES
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. The terrain,
obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active flight plan information
consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNV profile, TOD/BOD, and destination runway)
can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode. See the Hazard Avoidance section for information
about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on the VSD.
216
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track mode.
When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation map indicated
range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD altitude range automatically
changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant ratio of altitude range to horizontal
range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been met. At ranges above the maximum, the
altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on the vertical
scale is close to the top for a descent phase and in the middle for a cruise phase or if the phase is unknown.
EIS
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure any text,
one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint is displayed as
darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO waypoint, (2) waypoint
with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough for the
terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the Navigation Map).
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon the
highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within a
predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range
or active flight plan. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNV PATH descents because the lateral distance
of those legs in unknown. The VSD will not show a VNV profile for any legs that have no vertical path guidance.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VSD Mode (AUTO FPL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active FPL Waypoints
Altitude Constraints
Selected Alt.
(10000FT)
Destination Runway
Vertical Situation
Display (VSD)
Absolute Terrain
Current VNAV Profile
Figure 5-59 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
APPENDICES
VSD Mode Buttons
Obstacle
- FPL
- TRK
- Auto
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VSD Mode Displayed
Button
Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTO FPL
Auto
AUTO TRK
FPL Criteria
Items available on VSD
Available active FPL & aircraft
within FPL swath
(1) Active FPL available &
aircraft not within FPL swath,
or (2) Active FPL not available
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
selected altitude
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Flight Plan
FPL
Active FPL not available
Only shows message 'Flight Plan Not Available'
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
Track
TRK
NA
selected altitude
Active flight plan information includes waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNV profile, TOD/BOD, and destination runway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Active FPL available
Table 5-11 VSD Modes
VSD MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
‘Loading...’
‘Flight Plan Not Available’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable because aircraft off
course and active leg over 200 NM’
AFCS
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘VSD Not Available’
APPENDICES
‘VSD Data is old, disable and enable VSD’
Description
VSD is loading data due to a range change, full/half switch, or first being
selected for display.
Flight Plan mode is selected and there is not a flight plan loaded with at
least one leg.
All of the following are true:
- Flight Plan mode is selected
- The active leg is greater than 200 nm
- The aircraft is outside the swath
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is past the end of the active leg.
At least one of the following is true:
- Valid terrain database not available
- GPS MSL altitude not available
- Current barometric altitude not available
- Neither current track nor current heading available
- GPS position not available
- Map range setting is less than 1 nm
The system has encountered a delay and VSD data has failed to update
for 2 seconds or more. This message may be momentarily displayed and
then removed as the delay is overcome.
INDEX
Table 5-12 VSD System Messages
218
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Width of Swath
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Approach, Departure
Terminal
En Route, Oceanic
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Inset Softkey
4) Press the Off Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using any
Procedures (PROC) Key.
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special Procedures. Prior
EIS
to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization, training, and possession of the
corresponding current, and legitimately-sourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special
Procedure in the navigation database DOES NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and destination airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Furthermore, only one procedure for each type of procedure (DP, STAR,
APPR) can be loaded at a time in a flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-60 Procedure Leg Identifiers
220
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the ‘WPT’ Page Group):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or.
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or.
EIS
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. To select another airport, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure.
The cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs, as required, to highlight a runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway
or transition. The cursor moves to the next box. The procedure is previewed on the map.
6) Repeat Step 5, until desired information has been viewed for the chosen procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Departure Preview
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-61 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Departure
Departure Choices
INDEX
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-62 Departure Loading
222
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the ‘WPT’ Page Group), press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport information’ Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The
cursor moves to the ‘Runway’ Box. The departure is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The
cursor moves to the ‘Transition’ Box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on
the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a departure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Highlight and remove the departure:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the departure.
AFCS
b) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove
Departure’.
b) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
224
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active flight
plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
Destination Airport
Available Procedure Actions
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Arrival Preview
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Choices
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-63 Arrival Selection
Loaded Arrival
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 5-64 Arrival Loading
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’
Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor
moves to the ‘Transition’ Box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Runway’ Box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information ‘Page Menu’ Window.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
INDEX
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
226
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing an arrival from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Highlight and remove the arrival:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the arrival.
AFCS
b) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove
Arrival’.
b) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACHES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
INSTRUMENT APPROACH
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
EIS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels according
to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach service
level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory
vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV minima
(available only if (downgrades to L/VNAV (Baro VNAV) if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima (downgrades
(available only if to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS available) SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima (downgrades
(available only if to L/VNAV (Baro VNAV) if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
Example on HSI
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
Table 5-13 Approach Service Levels
228
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach Preview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures
Approach Choices
Figure 5-65 Approach Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Approach
Loaded Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-66 Approach Loading
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VISUAL APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system provides a visual approach feature. Unlike instrument approaches, visual approaches are not
defined in the navigation database and do not follow a precise prescribed path. Instead, the system calculates
the lateral and vertical path for the chosen runway and creates visual approach waypoints based on runway
position and course as specified in the navigation database.
EIS
Each visual approach will have two transitions, the straight in transition (STRAIGHT) and the Vectors-toFinal transition (VECTORS). The visual approach waypoints (fixes) consist of the initial fix (STRGHT), the
final approach fix (FINAL), and the missed approach point (RWxx). A 3 degree glide path is calculated from
the missed approach point up to each waypoint along the extended straight-in path.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For visual approaches, the pilot is responsible for avoiding terrain, obstacles and traffic. Therefore, when
a visual approach is selected, the message “Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches” is
displayed on the approach selection page and must be acknowledged before the visual approach is loaded
into the flight plan.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-67 Loading Visual Approach
APPROACH SELECTION AND REMOVAL
INDEX
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either ‘Load’ or ‘Activate’ is given. ‘Load’ adds the approach
to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued
navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for
quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately
begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
230
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In many cases, it may be easiest to load the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-To- Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘- NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS -’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
NOTE: When there is no arrival procedure in the flight plan, loading an approach after a destination airport
EIS
has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport waypoint being added to the end of
the enroute segment.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the ‘Channel’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Minimums
a) To set approach minimums, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ and press the ENT
Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, select ‘OFF’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘- NOT APPROVED FOR GPS GPS guidance is for monitoring only. Load approach?’ is displayed. With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
When a visual approach is selected, the message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is
displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the ‘NRST - Nearest Airport’ Page:
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
EIS
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the ‘Transition’ Field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘Load?’ field is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate?’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘- NOT APPROVED FOR GPS GPS guidance is for monitoring only. Load approach?’ is displayed. With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
When a visual approach is selected, the message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is
displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
APPENDICES
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
INDEX
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach ‘Channel’ Field.
232
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
EIS
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures’ Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) Press the PROC Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Approach’ and press the ENT Key.
3) From the ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is
displayed with ‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘- NOT APPROVED FOR GPS GPS guidance is for monitoring only. Load approach?’ is displayed. With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
When a visual approach is selected, the message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is
displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an approach from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Highlight and remove the approach:
EIS
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the approach.
b) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
b) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6600ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
ADANE). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
Course to Altitude Leg
Figure 5-68 Course to Altitude
234
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if
the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed with a snowflake icon
next to it.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manually inputting the temperature for compensation is explained in the following procedures. However
the system already automatically offsets the lateral position of the baro-VNV bottom of descent without
manual input. Once calculated, the VNV function seamlessly applies the lateral adjustment to the baro-VNV
descent path so that a smooth transition onto the approach vertical path occurs. For example, on a day with
temperatures colder than ISA, the baro-VNV path will typically be below the actual approach descent path.
The system will automatically adjust for this by calculating a lateral distance prior to the FAF which is applied
to ensure the baro-VNV path intersects the approach descent path.
AFCS
NOTE: Manually specifying temperature compensation for an approach will disrupt the system from
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
automatically creating a lateral offset of the VNV function in use..
NOTE: Initiating the VNV direct-to function or manually specifying an FPA at the FAF will disrupt the VNV
APPENDICES
function from creating a lateral offset. Thus, temperature is not compensated for and the baro-VNV path
may not intersect the approach descent path.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
235
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-69 Temperature Compensation
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Compensated
Altitudes
AFCS
Figure 5-70 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Manually setting temperature compensated altitude:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed with the temperature highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Use the small FMS Knob to change the ‘Temperature at <airport>’ Field. The compensated altitude is computed
for the temperature is selected.
236
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window on the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD, or in the ‘References’ Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
EIS
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the Aux Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Automatic/Manual
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Statistics
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
AFCS
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-71 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
INDEX
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
• Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information
is GPS altitude.
238
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs, derived from the flight plan. The system calculates these values depending on the specified mode flight plan mode (FPL Softkey enabled) or waypoint mode (WPTs Softkey enabled). Stored Flight Plans
may be used by selecting its corresponding number from the Flight Plan Catalog (01–99). ‘00’ is the default
number for the active flight plan.
In flight plan mode, with a stored flight plan selected, and the entire flight plan (‘CUM’) selected, the
waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
EIS
In flight plan mode , with a stored flight plan selected, and the desired leg selected (flight plan legs are
numbered in increasing order starting from ‘01’), the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode, with the active flight plan selected, and the remaining flight plan (‘REM’) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the active flight
plan.
In flight plan mode, with the active flight plan selected, and a specific leg selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is
the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In waypoint mode, these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these default to
the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It
is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999. • Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown as
minutes:seconds.
AFCS
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours+minutes and is the local time at the destination. - If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
- If the active flight plan is selected, the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to and
including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg
of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times - These times are shown as hours:minutes of the time at the
destination.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density Altitude
• True Airspeed
The pilot may select Auto or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection).
Selected Leg(s)
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Figure 5-72 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
APPENDICES
Not Available
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-73 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
240
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the ‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Trip Planning Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL Field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
until all desired values have been entered.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
EIS
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol on the MFD. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly below and
to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI. The CDI deviation bar remains, but is removed from the display after
20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available
(20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation
using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in the
following figure. If the VSD Inset is selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
While the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest
information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but
with degraded accuracy.
242
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Distance &
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current
Track
Indicator
EIS
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Course Deviation
Indicator
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-74 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev.A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
243
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
244
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A or 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Subscription Optional)
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) (Optional)
EIS
• Garmin GWX 68/75 Airborne Color Weather Radar (Optional)
• L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® Lightning Detection System
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVT (included with Garmin SVT option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B (TAWS-B)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• Garmin GTS 800 or Honeywell KTA 870 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) Traffic (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 DATA LINK WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of weather
sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include SiriusXM Weather,
Garmin Connext Weather, and Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather. For each source, a groundbased system processes the weather information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the optional Garmin GDL 69A or GDL 69 SXM SiriusXM Datalink
Receiver and an active service subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits
this information to the aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides continuous
reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver which
can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather information
periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated Ground-Based Transceivers
(GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is limited to line-of-sight, and is available
below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which
may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may
be present immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent
Surveillance (ADS-B) system, which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later
in this section for a more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Garmin Connext Weather service, available when equipped with the optional Garmin GSR 56 Iridium
Transceiver and an active service subscription, provides data link weather information to the aircraft after the pilot
defines a geographic area and subsequently selects a manual or automatically recurring Connext Data Request.
The transceiver then contacts the Garmin Connext Weather service using the Iridium Satellite telephone system
and retrieves the weather data for the specified area. The Garmin Connext Weather service offers worldwide
weather coverage, but the availability of individual weather products, such as radar precipitation, varies by region.
NOTE: To check the availability of Garmin Connext weather products offered in a particular region, visit
INDEX
http://www.flygarmin.com.
246
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer
service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID must be provided
to activate the weather service. An Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the receiver to provide SiriusXM
Radio entertainment. If the GDL 69A SXM receiver is installed, these IDs may be identical. To view this
information, refer to the following locations:
• The ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page on the MFD
EIS
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
These IDs may be the same.
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
AFCS
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this system. This pilot’s
APPENDICES
guide only discusses supported weather products.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
Select to Display XM
Information page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
ACTIVATING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Garmin Connext weather service requires an active Iridium satellite telephone and
weather data subscription. Registration begins by first obtaining the serial number(s) for the
installed Iridium Satellite Transceiver (GSR 1), and the System ID. Then go to the website
www.flygarmin.com and follow the instructions for establishing an account for Garmin Connext data services.
Note additional information about the airframe may be required. After an account has been established,
Garmin provides an access code that must be entered on the system and successfully transmitted to the
Garmin Connext service via the Iridium satellite network.
AFCS
Obtaining the LRU serial numbers and System ID:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the LRU Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll the cursor until ‘GSR 1’ is visible in the ‘LRU Information’ window.
4) Note the serial number displayed for ‘GSR 1’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
248
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System ID Number
Iridium Transceiver
Serial Number
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-2 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) Go to www.flygarmin.com. Locate the information for subscribing to Garmin Connext Satellite Services on the
website.
2) Choose a desired service which includes weather data and enter the requested information about the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Note the Access Code provided during the registration process and any additional instructions received.
4) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
Map page group.
AFCS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page. If another data link weather
source such as ‘XM’ or ‘FIS-B’ is displayed in the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link weather
source to CNXT before continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change
the data link source to prior to registration.
6) If the system displays the Connext Registration Window, proceed to step 8. Otherwise, press the MENU Key.
The page menu window is now displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
8) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears as shown in the following figure.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
249
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-3 Enter Access Code
9) Enter the access code provided by Garmin in the ‘Access Code’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10) Press the ENT Key. ‘Register’ is highlighted.
11) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System registration is complete
when the Current Registration Window displays the correct information for the Airframe, Tail Number, Airframe
Serial Number, and Iridium Serial Number.
AFCS
12) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the Connext Registration Window.
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft, such as an
airborne lightning detection system, data link weather by contrast relies on service providers to collect, process,
and transmit weather information to the aircraft. This information can come from a variety of sources such as
government agencies. Due to the time it takes to collect, process, and distribute data link weather information,
it is imperative for pilots to understand that data link weather information is not real-time information and may
not accurately depict the current conditions.
INDEX
APPENDICES
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as METAR flags, the system
can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in minutes, since the weather service
provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It does not represent the age of the information
contained within the weather product itself. For example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is comprised
data from multiple radar sites providing data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service provider
periodically compiles this data to create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image which
becomes the basis of the product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for data
250
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
link transmission at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within the
mosaic is therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention. The Garmin Connext weather service requires the pilot to select a manual or automatic (recurring)
weather data request in order to receive weather data updates.
EIS
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in white if it
is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its expiration time. After
a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product from the displays, and shows
white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears
instead of the age to show the product is currently not available for display. This may occur, for example, after
powering on the system but before the data link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It
could also indicate a possible outage of a weather product.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For PFD
maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
Enabling/disabling the weather product age for PFD Maps:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND to show/remove the weather product age information for PFD maps.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tables 6-1 and 6-2 show the weather product symbols, the and expiration times for SiriusXM Weather and
FIS-B Weather, respectively. The FIS-B broadcast rate represents the interval at which the FIS-B Weather service
transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated weather product information. It does not represent
the rate at which the weather information is updated or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. The
service provider and its weather data suppliers define and control the data update intervals, which are subject
to change.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
Cell Movement
30
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
METARs
90
City Forecast
90
Surface Analysis
60
Freezing Levels
120
Winds Aloft
90
County Warnings
60
Cyclone Warnings
60
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
90
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
Air Report(AIREP)
90
Turbulence
180
Radar Coverage Not Available
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
No product image
30
60
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
No product image
60
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
252
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
METARs
90
5
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
10
Winds Aloft
90
10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Symbol
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
FIS-B Weather Product
EIS
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
(TAF)
No product symbol
60
10
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No product symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following table shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration times and the
refresh rates. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Garmin Connext weather service makes available
the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which the service receives
new data from various weather sources. The pilot chooses how often to contact the Garmin Connext weather
service in order to retrieve weather data through the Connext Data Request.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
30
Infrared Satellite
60
30
Datalink Lightning
30
Continuous
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
Continuous
METARs
90
Continuous
Winds Aloft
90
Continuous
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
90
Continuous
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
60
Continuous
60
Continuous
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Precipitation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin Connext Weather Product
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terminal Aerodrome Reports TAFs)
no product image
AFCS
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take between 3 and
10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-3 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Weather Data Link Page is the principal map page for viewing data link weather information. This page
provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather products of any map on the system. The
Weather Data Link Page also provides system-wide controls for selecting the data link weather source, if more
than one source has been installed. The page title indicates the selected data link weather source (e.g., “XM”,
“CNXT”).
254
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age (US)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if applicable:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page. The currently selected data link
weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, or ‘Display Connext Weather’ (choices may vary
depending on the installed equipment).
b) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-5 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for map
overlays used throughout the system. The following tables show the softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page
based on the selected source.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS
NOTE: Only softkeys pertaining to data link weather features are shown in the following tables.
EIS
Level 1
NEXRAD
Level 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Top
CLD Top
XM LTNG
Cell MOV
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
More WX
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cyclone
SFC
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FRZ LVL
Wind
256
Level 3
Description
Enables/disables the NEXRAD weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Echo Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cloud Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Lightning weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cell Movement weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level SiriusXM Weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the Cyclone weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkey for enabling/disabling the Surface Analysis and
City Forecast weather product and selecting a forecast period.
Disables the Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather product overlay.
Displays the Surface Analysis for the current time period overlay.
Off
Current
12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, These softkeys display a Surface Analysis and City Forecast overlay for the
selected future time period.
48 HR
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the Freezing Level weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the chosen altitude.
the Surface (SFC) to Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
42,0000 feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
ICNG
AFCS
AIREPS
PIREPS
County
Back
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the AIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the County Warnings weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Back
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
Off
Softkeys available for
selecting Turbulence
altitude from 21,000
feet to 45,000 feet
Next
Legend
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays softkeys for enabling/disabling the Turbulence weather product
overlay.
Shows the previous level of Turbulence altitude softkeys.
Disables the Turbulence weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 21,000 feet to
45,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TURB
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 1,000 feet to
30,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
EIS
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from
the Icing altitude from
to 1,000 to 30,000 feet
Next
Legend
Description
Displays altitude softkeys for the Icing weather product overlay.
Shows the previous level of Icing altitude softkeys.
Disables the Icing weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PREV
Off
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT) PAGE SOFTKEYS)
Level 2
Level 3
More WX
Wind
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
PREV
Off
Description
Enables/disables the Precipitation weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
APPENDICES
IR SAT
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1
PRECIP
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from
the Surface to 42,0000
feet
Next
Legend
Back
EIS
PIREPs
Back
Description
Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
altitude.
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) PAGE SOFTKEYS)
Level 1
NXRD
Level 2
Level 3
Description
Cycles through NEXRAD display modes with each press:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off: No NEXRAD is shown.
US: Displays NEXRAD data for the Continental US (CONUS).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
IR SAT
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
AFCS
REG: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
More WX
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Wind
PIREPs
Back
258
All: Displays regional NEXRAD data where available, and CONUS NEXRAD
data in other coverage areas.
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS
Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional information about the following weather products can be displayed by panning the Map Pointer
over the following products on the Weather Data Link Page:
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Echo Tops
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
APPENDICES
Severe
Thunderstorm
Selected with Map
Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-6 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Certain weather products, such as METARs or TFRs have associated full text. When a weather product is
selected with the Map Pointer, press the ENT Key. The system displays the full text for the selected weather
product in a window. To remove the window, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Weather Data Link Page also has a page menu that can be accessed by pressing the MENU Key. It has
controls for enabling/disabling the weather products as an alternative to using the softkeys.
CUSTOMIZING THE WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
EIS
The Weather Data Link Page includes controls for selecting the maximum map range to display each weather
product on the page. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system
removes the weather product from the map. If more than one data link weather source has been installed, the
system uses the same maximum map range for the comparable weather product of another source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: ‘Product Group 2’ is only applicable to SiriusXM and Garmin Connext Weather.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
The pilot can choose a map orientation specific to the Weather Data Link Page, or choose to have
Selecting a map orientation for the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key. The Weather Setup menu appears.
4) With the cursor in the ‘Group’ window, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Map’ and press the ENT Key.
260
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) With the cursor in the Orientation field, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired Weather Data Link Page
map orientation (‘North up’, ‘Track up’, ‘HGD up’, or ‘SYNC’), then press the ENT Key.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the Weather Setup menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WEATHER PRODUCT MAP OVERLAYS
Echo Top
+
Infrared Satellite
+
Data Link Lightning
+
Cell Movement
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
+
+
+
+
Surface Analysis & City Forecast
+
Freezing Levels
+
Winds Aloft
+*
+
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METARs
+
+
Cyclone Warnings
+
Icing Potential
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
AFCS
County Warnings
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
APPENDICES
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage
TAFs
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cloud Top
Nearest Page
Group
+
‘Aux - Trip
Planning’ Page
Weather Data
Link Page
+
Weather
Information Page
Navigation Map
Page
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD/Radar Precipitation
EIS
Data Link Weather Product
PFD Maps
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The following
table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated with a ‘+’ symbol.
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Winds Aloft data is not available inside the VSD when FIS-B is the active data link weather source.
Table 6-4 Weather Product Display Maps
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.
The Navigation Map Page also can display legends for weather products enabled on this map with the
Legend Softkey. This softkey is subdued if no weather products are enabled.
Showing/removing the weather legend on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the weather legends window.
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display weather
products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system removes
the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation maps, including those
displayed on the PFD.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
AFCS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of data link products on the PFD map.
INDEX
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is enabled and
the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is available using the PFD
softkeys.
262
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and icon box display on PFD
Maps.
EIS
The setup menus for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map
range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger
than the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map.
The page menus also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data link weather product
overlays on maps.
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Data requests are not applicable to the SiriusXM Weather or FIS-B Weather services.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the pilot with the options to define the requested weather coverage
area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel weather data
requests. A Request Status Window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data Request.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all
currently available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s
present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field)
must be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates ‘INVALID COVERAGE
AREA’ and the system will not allow a request to occur.
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a
flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
AFCS
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to show or hide a
green check mark to select one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-8, 6-9):
Present Position – Requests data based on current location.
APPENDICES
•
• Destination – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one currently exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
the desired flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘Remaining FPL’ to request weather data for the
remainder of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Waypoint – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘Diameter / Route Width’ distance field and turn the small FMS Knob
to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-7 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-8 Connext Data Request Window
264
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Figure 6-9 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation Data Displayed
AFCS
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once
a connection is established, the Request Status Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with
an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request Menu may
be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue
to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete
depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of weather activity present, and the
Iridium signal strength.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) if it has
not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data
is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the Request Status Window indicates ‘OK’ if the
Connext Data Request menu is still within view.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Cancel Request’ field and press the ENT Key. The request status box
indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
enabled until the flight crew them, or the system power is removed. The Request Status Window indicates the
number of minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request Window and its associated options will not be available in Reversionary Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Update Rate’ field. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press
the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) The ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘Request Status’ Window
based on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext
Data Request.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
APPENDICES
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Datalink weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as relative terrain, echo
INDEX
tops, icing, or turbulence data.
266
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation radar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
APPENDICES
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
EIS
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown for the selected region (US or Canada).
The pilot can change the region on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
Changing the NEXRAD coverage region:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region datafield.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘US’ or ‘CNDA’ (Canada) and press the ENT Key.
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The system can animate a loop of NEXRAD information. The animated view is available on the Weather
Data Link (XM) Page, and on navigation maps with the exception of the HSI Map. Animation begins after
the system has received at least two recent NEXRAD images since the avionics power cycle. When NEXRAD
animation is enabled, a timeline appears in the upper-right corner of the map, except for the PFD Inset Map.
A pointer on the timeline indicates the relative position of the displayed frame of animation, from oldest to
newest. The NEXRAD weather product age corresponds to the displayed frame. The system can show up
to six frames of NEXRAD animation when the USA coverage option is selected, and up to three frames of
animation when Canada is selected.
APPENDICES
Displaying Time-Lapse NEXRAD Animation on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) With ‘Product Group 1’ selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Animation On/Off field.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, then press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The pilot enables/disables the NEXRAD animation feature for navigation maps from the Navigation Map
Page.
268
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Time-Lapse NEXRAD Animation on navigation maps:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Animation On/Off field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Reflectivity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
NEXRAD Limitations
APPENDICES
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
EIS
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation regardless of
actual precipitation type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
APPENDICES
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
INDEX
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
270
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images gathered from each NEXRAD site differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar synopsis and may not
depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for maneuvering
in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AFCS
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-13 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area.
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NXRD Softkey. Each selection cycles though a coverage option displayed in cyan on the softkey (‘Off’,
‘US’, or ‘REG’, or ‘All’).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information for the continental United States, turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD for the continental United
States or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
4) To enable/disable the display of Regional NEXRAD information, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
Regional On/Off field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of Regional NEXRAD or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
No radar coverage
APPENDICES
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
INDEX
Figure 6-14 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
272
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-15 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Menu
Figure 6-16 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Setup Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
AFCS
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
APPENDICES
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked boundary
encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed. The
system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of
the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be
viewed on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, press the Legend Softkey when the
NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
273
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
No radar coverage
Boundary of radar
coverage area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-17 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
Reflectivity
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AFCS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
APPENDICES
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
INDEX
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
274
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
PRECIPITATION (GARMIN CONNEXT)
EIS
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically,
the Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and
assigns a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather
product. Individual images gathered from each radar site differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
Precipitation
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Boundary of
weather data
request
APPENDICES
INDEX
Precipitation
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-18 Precipitation Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI or Map Opt Softkey). This step is not necessary
on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The system displays either base or composite radar imagery, depending on the region.
Region
Radar Reflectivity Type
United States
Composite Reflectivity
Canada, Europe, Australia
Base Reflectivity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a single
antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest radar energy
received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation
legend, press the Legend Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
AFCS
No radar coverage
Boundary of
weather data
request
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-19 Precipitation Weather Product Legend
APPENDICES
The display of radar coverage is enabled active when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line depicting the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request encloses the
precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
INDEX
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
276
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
• Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
EIS
• An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about
storms directly over the site.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of radar data are viewable. Each block of radar information
represents approximately four square kilometers and depicts the highest level of reflectivity detected
within that area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-20 Precipitation Weather Product at 10 NM Map Range
APPENDICES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
INDEX
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS (SIRISUXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude for
selected Echo Top
Figure 6-21 Echo Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are removed.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-22 Echo Tops Legend
278
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is approximately every
EIS
30 minutes. As with all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half
of the expiration time, which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be
amber during routine operation due to a less frequent broadcast rate compared to other data link weather
products.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-23 Cloud Tops Weather Product
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the CLD Top Softkey.
APPENDICES
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
INDEX
Figure 6-24 Cloud Tops Legend
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM, GARMIN CONNEXT)
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Data Link Lightning weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location
of the lightning strike is not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lightning
Strikes
AFCS
Figure 6-25 Data Link Weather Product
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT)’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page, press the Legend Softkey when Data Link
Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-26 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
INDEX
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
280
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)
EIS
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storm Cells
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
information for
selected Storm Cell
AFCS
Figure 6-27 Cell Movement Weather Product
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated Cel MOV
softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69 SXM or 69A SXM data link receiver is installed.
APPENDICES
In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the Cell MOV Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 6-28 Cell Movement Legend
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
INFRARED SATELLITE (GARMIN CONNEXT)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery.
Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
INDEX
Figure 6-29 Infrared Satellite Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Infrared Satellite information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the IR SAT Softkey.
282
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-30 Infrared Satellite Legend
EIS
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source and a GDL 69A SXM receiver installed, the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been
received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
NOTE: For Garmin Connext Weather only, the entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown on the map as long as any
portion of it is issued within the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AFCS
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SIGMET
APPENDICES
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 6-31 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the ‘Map- Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Press the ENT key. The following figure shows sample SIGMET text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Convective SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-32 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
AFCS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
284
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-33 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR and TAF data is displayed
first in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional
information not found in the decoded version.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
AFCS
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
285
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the Legend Softkey when METARs
are enabled for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the system cannot determine the METAR category based on the available information‑.
Figure 6-35 METAR Legend
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
The system shows a solid METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR. Hollow
METAR flags appear next to flight plan waypoints which are not directly associated with a METAR, but a
METAR exists within 30 NM of the flight plan waypoint. When this occurs, additional information appears
with the METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page indicating the origin and relative location of the source
METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated with a METAR flag next
to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
286
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
EIS
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-36 Current Surface Analysis Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
Or:
INDEX
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
287
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-37 Surface Analysis Legend
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears when it
becomes available.
Figure 6-38 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
288
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-39 Freezing Levels Legend
EIS
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft weather
product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the Wind Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Figure 6-40 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
289
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-41 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) on the
Navigation Map Page when the SiriusXM or Garmin Connext Weather service is the active data link weather
source. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft speed.
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
AFCS
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-42 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on the VSD
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in the following table.
Headwind Symbol
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
10 knots
INDEX
50 knots
Table 6-5 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
290
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings
from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
and flood conditions.
EIS
Flood
Warnings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Thunderstorm
Warning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-43 County Flood Warning
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the County Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 6-44 County Warnings Legend
292
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
DD/HH:MM.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cyclone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-45 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the Cyclone Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-46 Cyclone Legend
APPENDICES
NOTE: If a GDL 69 SXM or GDL 69A SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available
unless at least one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’
when no cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
EIS
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-47 Icing Weather Product
Figure 6-48 Icing Potential Legend
294
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs, SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-49 Turbulence Weather Product
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-50 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Urgent PIREP
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
AFCS
Figure 6-51 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with the SiriusXM Weather
service.)
APPENDICES
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
INDEX
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
296
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
Original PIREP
Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-52 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-53 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TFRS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where flight is
restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement,
natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on the
system is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS),
and air traffic control.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
297
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Information for
selected TFR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-54 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
298
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-55 Full Text for Selected TFR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range settings.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
EIS
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-56 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on the ADS-B Status Page
300
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Available
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No FIS-B weather data received from the transponder.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
Not Available
FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is not
receiving the FIS-B weather service.
Awaiting Data
The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR Graphical
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
Regional NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
Winds/Temp Aloft
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
Status
Message
Enabled
Disabled
----------------
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Status Page Item
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-6 ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
Weather Request
Status Message
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request to
reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error [1]
Connext Comm Error [2]
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the Request
Status Window.
Description
AFCS
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during the
previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
A communications error has occurred with an Integrated Aviations Units. The system should be
serviced.
Connext Comm Error [3] A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Connext Comm Error [4] This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or a GIA is off-line.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Connext Comm Error [5] The Iridium or Garmin Connext services are not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength. If this
error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6] A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [7] A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data request.
Connext Comm Error [8] A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Connext Login Invalid
EIS
Weather Request
Description
Status Message
Connext Comm Error [9] An error occurred while reading or writing data. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
Invalid Coverage Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a
waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is
enabled (checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
No Connext
Subscription
The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext services or the access code is
incorrect. Verify the access code. If information is correct, contact Garmin Aviation Support using
the information at www.flygarmin.com.
The size of the received weather data has exceeded system memory limits. Reduce the size of the
coverage area and issue another Connext Data Request to ensure all available weather data has
been received.
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Connext Server Temp
Inop
Connext Server Inop
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reduce Request Area
Request Canceled
Request Failed - Try
Again
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Verify information entered matches the
information provided from Garmin during registration. If this error persists, contact Garmin Aviation
Support using the information at www.flygarmin.com.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to
service in less than 30 minutes.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-7 Abnormal Garmin Connext Data Request Status Messages
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD maps will be available for display (see Table 6-4 for a list of weather products and their associated
map availability).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If manual Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new weather data
will be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior
to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in Reversionary Mode
(provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
302
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.2 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional Garmin GWX 75 Airborne Weather Radar is a solid-state pulsed Doppler radar. It combines
excellent range, sensitivity, and adjustable scanning profiles with high-definition, real-time weather information.
EIS
The optional Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a four-color digital pulsed radar with 6.5
kilowatts of output power. The pulse width is four microseconds (µs) on all ranges except the 2.5 nm range.
The radar uses a one µs pulse width at this range to reduce the returns smearing together on the display for
better target definition at close range.
Differences between the GWX 75 and 68 radars, where applicable, are discussed throughout this Pilot’s Guide
section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
This aircraft uses a 12-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º of pitch and roll.
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles. A
vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup activity at various altitudes.
Radar features common to both radar models include:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• WATCH® (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range cell
activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation (or
large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully reflect the weather behind a storm.
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges are not
being displayed.
Additionally, the following features are offered by the GWX 75:
AFCS
• Independent weather radar settings for the MFD and PFD HSI Map.
• Optional Turbulence Detection presents areas of turbulence up to 40 NM away associated with precipitation
using Doppler measurements.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Optional Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS), to remove ground clutter from the displays.
• Altitude-Compensated Tilt (ACT) management, which automatically adjusts the antenna tilt angle during
altitude changes to reduce the pilot workload.
PRINCIPLES OF AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
APPENDICES
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return echo.
The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the center of
the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out
and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip
if an object is ten nautical miles away.
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GWX 75, with the optional Turbulence Detection feature, has the capability to detect the velocity of
precipitation moving toward or away from the radar antenna using Doppler measurements. As the radar pulse
beam strikes a moving object repeatedly, the frequencies of the returned echoes shift in relation to the velocity at
which the object is moving. This effect is analogous to the audible pitch change observed when an emergency
vehicle’s siren gets closer and then moves further away. Doppler radar employs this effect to detect areas of
precipitation moving at a high rate of speed (indicative of turbulence), and to determine when an object, such
as the ground, is stationary. This system can use this information to suppress the display of ground clutter.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airborne weather radar information should be used to avoid areas of severe weather. The decision to fly into
an area of radar returns depends on the return intensity, spacing between the returns, aircraft capabilities, and
crew experience. Airborne weather radar detects rain or hail, not clouds or mist. The display may indicate clear
areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly between them. In addition,
Doppler radar measurement of precipitation velocity, available as an option on the GWX 75, only occurs when
rain or hail is moving along the radar beam and either toward or away from the antenna. The system cannot
detect Clear Air Turbulence as there are no radar echoes to process.
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ANTENNA BEAM ILLUMINATION
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes. The
radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The following figure depicts a radar
beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the same holds
true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible to
miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set to
zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 15 nautical miles.
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80
Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8°
0
0
15
Half Power at
s
Beam Sidelobe
Max Power at Beam Center
18,000 ft.
30
45
60
75
90
APPENDICES
Range (nautical miles)
Figure 6-57 Radar Beam from a 12 inch Antenna
INDEX
The curvature of the Earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings
of 150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.
304
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
320 nm
EIS
Figure 6-58 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
RADAR SIGNAL ATTENUATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from an object 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent object 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the radar system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing it
from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy
precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The
WATCH® feature can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas in question appear as shadowed or gray
on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also help detect radar shadows.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount
of wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RADAR SIGNAL REFLECTIVITY
Precipitation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The weather radar detects precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the
Earth or solid structures. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence directly.
It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar signal
reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or
drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-59 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
306
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-60 Precipitation Reflectivity by Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Returns
AFCS
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well-defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
APPENDICES
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Angle of Incidence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
Figure 6-61 Angle of Incidence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.
SAFE OPERATING DISTANCE
AFCS
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or objects are within
the MPEL boundary.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.
APPENDICES
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL)
INDEX
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 12 feet from the 12-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. This
recommendation slightly exceeds the calculation methods defined in Advisory Circular 20-68B. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.
308
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MPEL
Boundary
12’ for 12”
antenna
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-62 MPEL Boundary
BASIC ANTENNA TILT SETUP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.
AFCS
PRACTICAL APPLICATION USING THE BASIC TILT SETUP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes of 2,000 feet AGL or higher. If the displayed target advances on the display to within five
nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000 feet or
less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt four degrees can help separate ground returns from weather
returns in relatively flat terrain. This aligns the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground. Return
the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
APPENDICES
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals
100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.
309
4000
Change in Antenna Tilt
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
EIS
3000
10 nm
4000
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-63 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground,
a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet; at 50 nm, 20,000
feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being displayed at 10 nm
would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. When the ground target return moves to
five nm, maximum distance below the aircraft is 2,000 feet.
This setup provides a good starting point for practical use of the airborne weather radar. There are many
other factors to consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE COMPENSATED TILT (GWX 75)
After the pilot has identified an area of precipitation using manual antenna tilt controls, the Altitude
Compensated Tilt (ACT) feature can help maintain the display of the identified precipitation during climbs
or descents. ACT automatically adjusts the antenna tilt angle setting as the aircraft altitude changes. It keeps
the center of the radar beam at a constant altitude at 75% of the map range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
For example, if the ACT feature is enabled and the aircraft climbs, the system compensates by adjusting
the tilt downward. As the aircraft descends with ACT enabled, the system adjusts the antenna tilt upward.
The system uses the ground as a reference for adjusting the antenna tilt setting with ACT enabled. The ACT
feature is not typically used for an extended period during level flight.
310
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEATHER MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
WEATHER DISPLAY INTERPRETATION
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
32 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
Approximate
Precipitation Rate (in/hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
0.5 - 2
Magenta
50 dBZ and greater
>2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intensity
EIS
Weather Mode Color
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When evaluating various radar returns, colors denote precipitation intensity and rates. The following table
shows the correlation for intensity and color the GWX 68.
Table 6-8 Precipitation Intensity Levels in Weather Mode (GWX 68)
If a GWX 75 is installed, the following table shows the correlation for intensity and color:
Intensity (in dBz)
< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ or 24 dBZ
25 dBZ or 26 dBZ
27 dBZ or 28 dBZ
29 dBZ or 30 dBZ
31 dBZ or 32 dBZ
33 dBZ or 34 dBZ
35 dBZ or 36 dBZ
37 dBZ or 38 dBZ
39 dBZ or 40 dBZ
41 dBZ or 42 dBZ
43 dBZ or 44 dBZ
45 dBZ or 46 dBZ
47 dBZ or 48 dBZ
49 dBZ to 50 dBZ
51 dBZ to 53 dBZ
> 54 dBZ
TURB- Turbulence Detection uses the color white
to show areas of rain or hail that may also contain
turbulence (optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
White
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather Mode Color
Black
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red
Red
Red
Magenta
Magenta
Magenta
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Table 6-9 Precipitation Intensity Levels in Weather Mode (GWX 75)
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Thunderstorms
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from weather radar information. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
EIS
• Areas that show red or magenta (or also white if a GWX 75 is installed and the optional Turbulence
Detection feature is enabled) are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation. Vertical
scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Squall Line
Steep Gradient
Hook or Finger
Scalloped Edge
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-64 Cell Irregularities
INDEX
APPENDICES
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
312
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-65 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Blind Alley at Close Range
The Large Storm Behind
Figure 6-66 The Blind Alley
AFCS
Tornadoes
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (9 in the southern hemisphere), especially
if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern hemisphere) of
a major thunderstorm.
APPENDICES
• V-shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Hail and Radar Tops
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can give
the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by radar.
It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes in clear
air and may be much higher than the radar top. Neither the radar top nor the actual top necessarily indicate
the top of the hazardous area, which may be much higher.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
Stratus Precipitation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Detecting areas of low altitude, stratus precipitation while the aircraft altitude is significantly above the
precipitation is difficult to accomplish with airborne weather radar. This is because as the radar beam
detects the low altitude precipitation, it also receives significant ground returns which are displayed
with the precipitation. Raising the antenna tilt angle may reduce the ground returns, however the radar
beam is likely to overshoot the low-altitude precipitation when the aircraft is at a high altitude above the
precipitation.
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80
AFCS
Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.
8°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
0
0
15
18,000 ft.
30
45
Stratus Rain at Low Altitude
60
75
90
Range (nautical miles)
APPENDICES
Figure 6-67 Stratus Rain Combines with Ground Returns when Aircraft is at Higher Altitudes
As the aircraft descends to a lower altitude, increasing the antenna tilt angle may help to reduce unwanted
ground returns and make the display of stratus precipitation more apparent.
NOTE: The optional Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) feature of the GWX 75 may remove the display of
INDEX
low-intensity precipitation in addition to ground returns when the feature is enabled.
314
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airborne weather radar and NEXRAD are prominent tools for hazardous weather avoidance. Each
technology has distinct characteristics to consider when evaluating potentially hazardous weather
conditions. Refer to Section 6.1 for a general description of NEXRAD.
Convective weather activity is known to develop rapidly, with cell growth capable of exceeding several
thousand feet per minute. Airborne weather radar provides the flight crew with real-time weather avoidance
information for precipitation detected within the airborne weather radar’s beam.
EIS
NEXRAD information is not real-time. It is intended to assist the flight crew with hazardous weather
avoidance planning. NEXRAD images are comprised of individual radar scans arriving at a network at
different rates and times, which are periodically compiled into a mosaic (the NEXRAD weather product)
and transmitted via data link. Due to inherent delays in this process, it is common for the displayed
NEXRAD images to be older than the current weather situation, and may also differ from information the
airborne weather radar presents.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Both airborne weather radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel
is a logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne weather radar measures the ratio of
power against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or
the radar reflectivity ratio. Although both radar systems use colors to identify the different echo
intensities, the thresholds and colors are not interchangeable. For example, NEXRAD may display
light precipitation as green, while airborne weather radar may not show the same precipitation at all if it is
below the display threshold unique to airborne weather radar. Refer to Table 6-11 for precipitation intensity
levels and colors for airborne weather radar, and to the NEXRAD reflectivity legend shown in Figure 6-11.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Because NEXRAD operates from an extensive network of ground-based radar antennas performing 360º
scans, it is capable of providing information on large-scale weather patterns such as precipitation associated
with significant frontal activity from multiple radar locations. Airborne weather radar can perform up to
120º scan, but is more affected by distance and precipitation attenuation discussed earlier in this section.
Other factors including curvature of the earth (particularly at map ranges greater than 150 miles), antenna
tilt setting, and aircraft altitude may also cause the airborne weather radar’s antenna beam to miss areas of
precipitation which are detected by NEXRAD. In addition, since the airborne weather radar’s beam often
produces ground returns, it may be difficult to distinguish precipitation from ground returns, especially
stratus rain when the aircraft is above the precipitation.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Both airborne weather radar and the NEXRAD system can detect a radar top of a storm cell. Airborne
weather radar can display this information in vertical scan mode, while NEXRAD radar top information
appears in the Echo Tops SiriusXM Weather Product (Refer to Section 6.1 for more information about
SiriusXM Weather). Because airborne weather radar and NEXRAD use different detection thresholds, a
radar top from airborne weather radar may appear 5,000 feet or more below the NEXRAD-derived Echo
Top. Furthermore, radar top information provided from either source is not the actual or true top of the
storm, which is only observable with the eyes in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top
detected by either system.
APPENDICES
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Because airborne weather radar and NEXRAD present information using similar (but not interchangeable
colors), only one radar source may be shown on a map Display Pane at a time. Pilots should carefully
consider information from airborne and data link weather sources, in addition to other available resources
to avoid flight into hazardous weather conditions.
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION IN WEATHER MODE
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ground, no personnel or objects should be within 12 feet of the antenna.
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the
radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
EIS
The GWX 75 weather radar allows the flight crew to display weather radar information on the MFD as well
as the HSI Map. Each map display can have unique settings. For example, the pilot may select Ground Mode
for the HSI Map, and Weather Mode on the MFD Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GWX 68 is limited to displaying information on the MFD.
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically places
the radar in Standby mode on landing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In Reversionary Mode, the GWX 75 can still be displayed and controlled on the HSI Map using the PFD
softkeys, discussed later in this section.
In Reversionary Mode, the GWX 68 cannot be controlled, and the radar enters Standby Mode.
Radar Feature Status
(GWX 75)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Weather Radar Mode
APPENDICES
Antenna Tilt Angle,
Bearing, Sector Scan
and Gain Settings
Figure 6-68 Weather Radar Page with a Horizontal Scan Selected (GWX 75)
Displaying weather on the Weather Radar Page:
INDEX
1) Select the Weather Radar Page in the Map Page Group with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the Mode Softkey.
316
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) While on the ground, press the Standby Softkey. For the GWX 68 only, a one-minute warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the GWX 68 enters Standby
Mode. The GWX 75 enters Standby Mode immediately.
Press the Weather Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a)
EIS
b)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-69 Confirming Activating Radar
Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Yes’ and press the ENT Key to continue radar activation.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft is airborne, press the Weather Softkey. For the GWX 68 only, a one-minute warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.
The GWX 75 begins transmitting as soon as the pilot presses the Weather Softkey.
4) Turn the Joystick to select the desired map range.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) The horizontal scan is initially displayed. If desired, press the Vertical Softkey to change to vertical scanning.
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant
adjustment of the Bearing Line.
AFCS
1) While in the Horizontal Scan view, press the BRG Softkey. This places the cursor in the ‘Bearing’ field and
displays the Bearing Line.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Press the MENU Key and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Bearing Line’, then press the ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
317
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Bearing Line
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Scan Line
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-70 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan
3) Press the Vertical Softkey. A vertical scan of the selected area is now displayed.
4) The small FMS Knob may be used to move the scanned bearing line a few degrees right or left.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the Joystick to adjust the range.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
7) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, press the Horizontal Softkey to return to the Horizontal Scan
view and repeat the previous steps.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the Joystick left or right can also adjust the bearing.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Tilt Line
Figure 6-71 Vertical Scan Display
318
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Horizontal Scan display:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the Tilt field.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Joystick can also be used to adjust tilt up and down.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Vertical Scan display:
1) Press the Tilt Softkey to activate the cursor in the Tilt field and display the Tilt Line.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Show Tilt Line’. Press the
ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the antenna tilt angle. The selected tilt angle is implemented when Horizontal
Scan is again selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Joystick can also be used to adjust tilt.
Enabling calibrated gain:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page.
AFCS
2) Press the CAL Gain Softkey. When the softkey annunciator is green, calibrated gain is enabled, disabled when
gray.
Or:
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Calibrated Gain’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Manually adjusting gain:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) Select the Weather Radar Page.
2) If the CAL Gain Softkey is enabled, press the softkey to disable Calibrated Gain.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the gain for the desirable level. The gain setting is visible in the Gain field
as a movable horizontal bar in a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference depicting the calibrated position.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished viewing precipitation with the manual gain setting, press the CAL Gain
Manual Gain set lower than Calibrated Gain Setting
Calibrated Gain Setting
AFCS
Figure 6-72 Gain Calibration
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While in horizontal scan mode, select the BRG Softkey to display the Bearing Line and place the cursor in the
Bearing field. If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select
Show Bearing Line.
APPENDICES
Enabling/disabling Sector Scanning:
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing Line
becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
2) Press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the Sector Scan field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired scan. Selecting ‘Full’ enables a 90º scan.
INDEX
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
7) Select the BRG Softkey again to remove the Bearing Line and cursor. The bearing reference is reset to 0º.
320
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-73 40° Sector Scan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Antenna Stabilization
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Antenna stabilization corrects the radar tilt for changes to pitch and roll, and therefore is kept steady with
respect to an Earth-fixed reference. The commanded tilt angle is kept constant with respect to the Earth’s
horizon.
If the selected antenna tilt angle is 0°, and the aircraft is then pitched up 5°, stabilization will automatically
decrease the tilt angle by 5° in order to maintain the selected 0° of antenna tilt relative to the Earth’s horizon.
If the aircraft is flying straight and level, then stabilization system does not provide any compensation as it
is unnecessary.
AFCS
The antenna stabilization feature requires AHRS pitch and roll information, and is always enabled. If any
required information is missing, antenna stabilization becomes inoperative and a ‘STAB INOP’ annunciation
appears on the Weather Radar Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH®)
APPENDICES
While in horizontal scan mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies
in displayed intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The
radar energy weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation,
and distance. Issues with the radome also attenuates the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the
return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy
of the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions
with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the
extent of attenuation in a shaded area.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling the display of WATCH attenuation:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Features Softkey.
3) Press the WATCH Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show WATCH Shading’ or ‘Hide WATCH Shading’, then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Areas of
Attenuated Signal
Figure 6-74 Horizontal Scan with WATCH Enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather Alert Bands and PFD Alert
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of precipitation beyond the currently selected map range
on the Weather Radar Page. These appear as bands along the outer ring at the approximate azimuth of the
detected returns.
APPENDICES
For the GWX 68 only, red bands are displayed to represent strong returns beyond the current map range.
INDEX
For the GWX 75, bands are displayed using colors representative of the highest return received for a
given bearing.
322
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If potentially severe weather beyond 105 NM is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, and the WX
ALRT Softkey is enabled on the Weather Radar Page, the system also displays an alert on the PFD in the
Alerts Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, ground returns may also trigger a weather alert. To avoid unwanted
weather alerts from being displayed on the PFD, deselect the WX ALRT Softkey on the Weather Radar Page.
When the WX ALRT Softkey is disabled, the display of weather alert bands on the Weather Radar Page
is also disabled.
Enabling/inhibiting weather alerts:
EIS
1) Select the Weather Radar Page.
2) Press the Features Softkey.
3) Press the WX ALRT Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable PFD Weather Alert’ or ‘Disable PFD Weather Alert’, then press the ENT
Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Weather Alert
Bands
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-75 Weather Alert Bands on the Weather Radar Page
INDEX
Figure 6-76 Weather Alert on PFD
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GROUND MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD.
EIS
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the table below. Use of the
Gain and Tilt Softkeys help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.
As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Ground Map Mode Color
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
Magenta
Black
Cyan
Yellow
Blue
Intensity
0 dB
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
9 dB to < 18 dB
18 dB to < 27 dB
27 dB and greater
Table 6-10 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operation in Ground Map Mode:
1) Select the Mode Softkey.
2) Select the Ground Softkey to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
3) Select the Back Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the Tilt field.
6) Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small FMS Knob to display ground returns at the desired distance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ADDITIONAL WEATHER RADAR DISPLAYS
APPENDICES
The ‘Map - Weather Radar’ Page is the principal map page for viewing airborne weather radar information.
Airborne weather radar information may also be shown as an overlay on the Navigation Map Page. For the
GWX 75 only, the airborne weather radar is also available on the HSI Map.
INDEX
When the airborne weather radar overlay is enabled on a navigation map, a weather radar information box
appears on the map. It indicates the selected radar mode, radar range, antenna tilt angle, and gain setting. The
navigation map overlay uses a horizontal scan. For the GWX 68 only, the weather radar must be in horizontal
scan mode on the Weather Radar Page in order for the weather radar to display data on the Navigation Map
Page, otherwise the system indicates ‘N/A’ in the information box until horizontal scan mode is selected on the
Weather Radar Page. The GWX 75 allows either horizontal or vertical scan to be selected on the Weather Radar
Page, and shows a horizontal scan on the navigation maps with the weather radar overlay.
324
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Radar Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Radar Range
Antenna Tilt Angle
Gain Setting
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Tilt and Bearing
Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-77 Airborne Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page
Enabling/disabling Airborne Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the WX Radar Softkey.
Or:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
2) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group, then press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the product selections and highlight the ‘Weather Radar’ overlay
selection (‘On’ or ‘Off’). Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired selection.
5) To remove the menu, press the FMS Knob or CLR Key.
APPENDICES
Weather radar controls on the Navigation Map Page are limited to adjustment of the radar range, bearing,
and antenna tilt angle. The airborne weather radar overlay is viewable at Navigation Map Ranges between 1.5
and 500 nautical miles. At map ranges beyond these limits, the system removes the weather radar information
from the map. Adjusting the range on the Navigation Map Page simultaneously adjusts the range of the weather
radar proportionally. This radar range is annunciated in the weather radar information box that appears when
the overlay is enabled. When the radar range is adjusted on the Navigation Map Page, system synchronizes the
same range to the Weather Radar Page.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The radar bearing is adjustable in one degree increments on the Navigation Map Page using the Joystick
when the overlay is enabled. The bearing line appears on the Navigation Map Page as a white dashed line, and
is displayed during and momentarily after adjustment.
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Radar antenna tilt angle is adjustable in 0.25 degree increments on the Navigation Map Page using the
Joystick. An up or down arrow next to the antenna tilt angle setting indicates the direction of the antenna tilt
angle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the bearing and antenna tilt angle on the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the weather radar overlay enabled, push the Joystick twice. The bearing and tilt legend is displayed.
2) Move the Joystick up to adjust the antenna tilt angle downward, or move the Joystick up to adjust the
antenna tilt angle upward.
EIS
3) Move the Joystick left or right to adjust the bearing line in the desired direction. The bearing line is displayed
during and momentarily after adjustment.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If a GWX 75 is installed and the aircraft is in the air, PFD softkeys control the airborne weather radar overlay
when the HSI Map is displayed. These softkeys are subdued if the aircraft is on the ground. The pilot and
copilot can select a weather radar mode for each PFD (Standby, Weather, Ground), make adjustments to antenna
gain, antenna tilt angle, or enable/disable antenna stabilization or Altitude Compensated Tilt features. Weather
radar settings on the HSI Map are independent for each PFD. For example, the pilot’s PFD may have Weather
Mode selected while the copilot’s PFD may have Standby Mode selected. The GWX 75 weather radar performs
multiple scans as necessary to accommodate displays of weather radar data between the PFD and MFD.
Controlling of weather radar information on the HSI Map (GWX 75 Only):
1) If necessary, enable the HSI Map on the PFD.
2) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the WX Radar Softkey to enable/disable the airborne weather radar HSI Map overlay.
4) Press the RDR Opt Softkey.
5) To select a weather radar mode, press the Mode Softkey.
AFCS
a) Press a softkey for the desired mode: Standby, Weather, or Ground. The selected mode only affects the
PFD on which the softkey is selected.
b) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
6) To select a weather radar feature, press the Features Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press a softkey for the desired mode: WX ALRT, WX WATCH, ACT, or TURB. Note the Turbulence
Detection feature is optional.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
326
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the Gain- Softkey to decrease the gain setting or press the Gain+ Softkey to increase the gain setting in
increments of 0.5 with each press, or press and hold the softkey for continuous adjustment. A gain setting of
0.0 is equivalent to the calibrated gain setting.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Move the PFD Joystick up to adjust the antenna tilt angle downward, or move the Joystick down to adjust
the antenna tilt angle upward.
9) Press the GCS Softkey to enable/disable the Ground Clutter Suppression feature. Note the Ground Clutter
Suppression feature is optional.
10) When finished adjusting the HSI Map display of the airborne weather radar, press the Back Softkey.
EIS
The weather radar overlay uses the same colors as those shown on the Weather Radar Page to indicate the
intensity of radar returns. However, the display of gray WATCH radar attenuation and red weather alert bands
is exclusive to the Weather Radar Page. Because data link radar precipitation and relative terrain present
information using similar colors, enabling the airborne weather radar overlay on the navigation amps disables
the display of the data link radar and relative terrain information for this page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM STATUS
Radar Mode
Standby
Standby
STANDBY
or
WARM-UP
Weather
Weather
None
Ground Mapping
Radar Failed*
Ground Mapping
FAIL
None
RADAR FAIL
AFCS
Center Banner Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Radar Mode Annunciation Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system displays the radar mode annunciation in the upper left corner of the Weather Radar Page. Additional
information may be displayed in the center of the Weather Radar Page as a center banner annunciation. Refer to
the following tables for a list of annunciations and their locations for airborne weather radar.
* See Table 6-13 for additional failure annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-11 Radar Modes on the Weather Radar Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system displays the status of the weather radar features in the upper-right corner of the Weather Radar
Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Feature Status
STAB INOP
EIS
Altitude Comp Tilt On
Altitude Comp Tilt Off
GND CLTR Suppress On
GND CLTR Suppress Off
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GND CLTR Suppress Inactive
GND CLTR SUP INOP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TURB Detection On
TURB Detection Off
TURB Detection Inactive
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TURB Detection Unavailable
Description
The radar is not receiving pitch and roll information. The antenna
stabilization feature is inoperative.
The altitude-compensated tilt feature is selected on (GWX 75).
The altitude-compensated tilt feature is selected off (GWX 75).
The ground clutter suppression feature is selected on (GWX 75 option).
The ground clutter suppression feature is selected off (GWX 75 option).
The ground clutter suppression feature is enabled, but the radar is in a
mode which cannot support ground clutter suppression (e.g. vertical scan
or sector scan) (GWX 75 option).
The radar is missing data needed to suppress ground clutter and the
feature is inoperative (GWX 75 option).
The turbulence detection feature is selected on (GWX 75 option).
The turbulence detection feature is selected off (GWX 75 option).
Turbulence detection is inactive when map range is greater than 160 nm,
or radar is in a mode which cannot support turbulence detection (GWX
75 option).
The radar is missing data needed to detect turbulence (GWX 75 option).
Table 6-12 Radar Feature Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
If the weather radar unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown as a banner in the center
of the Weather Radar Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Weather Radar Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
BAD CONFIG
The radar configuration is invalid. The radar should be serviced.
RDR FAULT
The radar unit is reporting a fault. The radar should be serviced.
RADAR FAIL
The system is not receiving valid data from the radar unit. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-13 Abnormal Radar Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
328
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
EIS
information from data link lightning sources.
Lightning Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope lightning detection system information on the Stormscope
Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the following table to depict
lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-14 Lightning Age and Symbols
AFCS
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
On the Stormscope Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm,
and 200 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
329
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Stormscope Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Figure 6-78 Stormscope Page with Cell Mode Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike softkeys are displayed.
AFCS
3) Press the Cell Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the Strike Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper right corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or ‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted
in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the menu without changing
modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn . This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays on the system.
INDEX
Manually clearing Stormscope cell or strike information:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
330
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Press the Clear Softkey.
Or:
a) On the Stormscope Page, press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’, then press the ENT Key.
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD maps:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The following options are available:
APPENDICES
• Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
• Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope symbols.
Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
• Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters or cells
of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity. Stormscope identifies clusters of
electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-79 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
332
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 TERRAIN DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting requires the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B option. No terrain or obstacle
alerting occurs for the Terrain Proximity feature.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The terrain system increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
obstacles.
One of the following terrain systems is installed on this aircraft:
• Terrain Proximity
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Terrain-SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option when the Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B
(TAWS-B) is not installed; refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about Garmin SVT.)
• TAWS-B (optional)
AFCS
The installed terrain system provides color indications on map displays when terrain or obstacles, including
certain power lines, are within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B furthermore
provide advisory visual annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles
relevant to the projected flight path. This alerting capability is not present in the Terrain Proximity feature.
Compared to Terrain-SVT alerting, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from
terrain and obstacles. The TAWS-B system includes more alerting capabilities than the Terrain-SVT system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain system requires the following for proper operation:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain and obstacle databases
APPENDICES
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government and other sources. Terrain
information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual
obstructions, such as towers or power lines, may be shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data
to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being
all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The terrain system uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and
altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above
geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system
uses GSL altitude to determine alerts for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems. GSL altitude accuracy is affected
by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure
altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widelyused MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to
calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The terrain and obstacle databases used by the terrain system are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
and GSL altitude, terrain system displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, for the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, the system uses the
GPS position and GSL altitude to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding
terrain and obstacles. In this manner, the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems can provide advanced alerts of predicted
dangerous terrain conditions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
The terrain system uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and point obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically
adjusts these colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the OnGround Legend. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain information using red,
yellow, green, and black, as shown on the In-Air Legend. As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or
from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. For
Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, if an alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition to the In-Air Legend if
the On-Ground Legend was shown in order to provide the pilot with the most information possible.
In-Air Legend
INDEX
APPENDICES
On-Ground Legend
Figure 6-80 Relative Terrain Legend
The following figure shows the relative terrain coloring for the Terrain Proximity system.
334
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
100 ft Threshold
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Red
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
EIS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-81 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following figure shows relative terrain coloring for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems.
Projected Flight Path
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
100 ft Threshold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Figure 6-82 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Systems
NOTE: The Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Inset Window shows terrain at least 2000 feet below the aircraft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
altitude as gray.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the terrain systems.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
EIS
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-15 Relative Point Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Wire Obstacle
Wire Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red wire obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude
Yellow wire obstacle is between the aircraft altitude to within 250 feet below
the aircraft altitude
White wire obstacle is more than 250 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-16 Relative Wire Obstacles and Colors
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
AFCS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft
altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-17 Relative Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
336
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems show potential impacts areas for terrain and obstacles using yellow and
red as shown in the following table.
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Potential Impact
Area Examples
TAWS-B Warning
Warning
Terrain-SVT Warning
or
EIS
Caution
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-18 Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
• PFD Maps
• Trip Planning Page
• ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page’
• Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’ or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page is the principal map page for
viewing terrain information. Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and
pages:
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying relative terrain information (MFD maps other than the terrain page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey as needed to cycle through the terrain options, with the current selection displayed in
cyan on the softkey (‘Off’, ‘Topo’ or ‘REL’). ‘REL’ indicates relative terrain is selected.
AFCS
When relative terrain is shown on maps other than the terrain page, a relative terrain icon appears on the
map. A relative terrain legend appears with the icon on the Navigation Map Page. The legend appears by itself
on the terrain page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling
the display of relative terrain, point obstacles (such as towers), and wire obstacles (such as power lines). The
setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and obstacle data are decluttered from the
display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. For
terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the maximum range setting also affects
the PFD maps.
APPENDICES
The pilot can display relative terrain information independently of point or wire obstacle information;
however, obstacles for which Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B warnings and cautions are issued are shown when terrain
is selected for display and the map range is within the setting limit.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Maps besides the terrain page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The maximum
display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation Map.
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
• Terrain Display – Enables the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data or select ‘Off’ to disable; also sets
maximum map range at which terrain is shown.
• Point Obstacle – Enables/disables the display of point obstacle data and sets maximum range at which point
obstacles are shown
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Wire Obstacle – Enables/disables the display of wire obstacle data and sets maximum range at which wire
obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AFCS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
APPENDICES
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-83 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
338
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’, or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’, or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page is specialized to show terrain,
and obstacle in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. This page is the
principal page for viewing terrain information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be
enabled for reference.
For Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems only, this page also shows potential impact areas. If terrain or obstacles
(including wire obstacles) and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts
to a map range if necessary to emphasize the display of the potential impact area.
EIS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in which case the
orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 250 feet to 1000 nm, which is indicated
on the map range arc.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying the terrain page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Orientation
AFCS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Terrain Legend
TAWS Annunciation
Figure 6-84 TAWS-B Page
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WIRE OBSTACLE INFORMATION AND ALERTING
EIS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is important to note the obstacle database does not contain all power lines. In fact, WireAware database
coverage is mostly limited to HOT power lines, such as the especially tall transmission lines and their associated
support structures. It does not typically have information for the more prevalent smaller utility poles or lines,
such as those found in residential areas. Furthermore, WireAware obstacle database coverage exists mainly in
the United States; with limited coverage in portions of Canada and Mexico. In addition, the height of the wire
obstacles is commonly estimated and should not be relied upon for maneuvering decisions.
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WireAware database information mainly includes Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) power lines which
are typically high voltage transmission lines depicted on VFR Sectional charts, and are considered of special
interest to fixed-wing pilots. These include power lines which may span rivers, valleys, canyons, or be in close
proximity to airports/heliports.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For additional safety, the terrain system incorporates Garmin’s WireAware™ wire obstacle information. For
wire obstacles such as power lines present in the obstacle database, the system shows these on the maps as well
as the Synthetic Vision display; see the Flight Instruments section for more information about Synthetic Vision
displays of power lines. For the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B only, this system can also issue cautions or warnings
for potential impact with wire obstacles.
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles in an
inset window on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. Although the VSD does not display Terrain-SVT or
TAWS-B alerts and potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and symbols as these
systems to depict relative terrain and obstacles within the VSD.
NOTE: Wire obstacle symbols are not depicted in the Vertical Situation Display (VSD).
Enabling/Disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
AFCS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable or disable the VSD.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the Navigation Map
Page also control the display of this information in the VSD.
340
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VSD DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the VSD is enabled, terrain and obstacles in the VSD will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low
enough or the VSD altitude range is high enough for the terrain to be in view (absolute terrain will be shown
in gray if the TER Softkey is selected off on the Navigation Map Page).
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon
the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution,
within a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present position and the end of the
map range. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as annunciated on the HSI, and is widest
during enroute or oceanic phases.
EIS
Total VSD Width
0.6 nm
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
4.0 nm
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Phase
Approach
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-19 VSD Terrain Width Varies with Phase of Flight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the top-left corner
of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan, and if no active
flight plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In Track Mode, the contour
is based on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based on the active flight plan, when
available, otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
Selecting a VSD Mode:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the VSD Softkey displaying the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey cycles through a mode
selection: FPL (flight plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
APPENDICES
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is adjusted
to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the Navigation Map range is
adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile. When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the VSD; only an outline of the terrain will be
displayed in black in the VSD Inset Window.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Track Mode
Boundary enabled
Terrain Legend
EIS
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Scale
VSD Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-85 Relative Terrain Information on the VSD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for especially tall obstacles), a vertical
line appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-86 VSD with Tall Obstacles
APPENDICES
TRACK MODE BOUNDARY
INDEX
The Track Mode Boundary represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the VSD. The boundary is
shown as a white rectangle on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page and is only available when the VSD is enabled
in Track Mode. White range markers on both edges of the Track Mode Boundary rectangle match the range
markers along the distance scale inside the VSD Inset Window whenever the profile range is at least four
nautical miles (or 7.5 km if configured for metric units).
342
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Track Mode Boundary may be enabled/disabled, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• TRK Mode BNDRY – Enables/disables the display of the Track Mode Boundary and sets maximum range at
which Track Mode Boundary is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERRAIN-SVT AND TAWS-B ALERTING DISPLAYS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B software
algorithms. Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B alerts typically employ a caution or a warning alert severity level, or both.
When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The terrain alert annunciation appears
to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom on the MFD. If the terrain page is not displayed
at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page)
AFCS
Alert Annunciation
Pop-up
Alert
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-87 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
343
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Potential Impact
Area
Terrain Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-88 TAWS-B Page with Terrain Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following table lists the possible Terrain-SVT alerts.
PFD/TerrainSVT Page
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning; Wire, Wire”
Reduced Required Line Clearance (RLC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
AFCS
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Line Impact Caution (ILI)
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
APPENDICES
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
Reduced Required Line Clearance
Caution (RLC)
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
INDEX
Voice Alert
Table 6-20 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
344
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following table lists the TAWS-B alerts.
Alert Type
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Line Impact
Warning (ILI)
Reduced Required LIne
Clearance Warning (RLC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
EIS
“Wire Ahead; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Wire, Wire; Pull Up, Pull Up”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“Caution, Wire; Caution, Wire”
“Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead”
AFCS
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
APPENDICES
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Required Reduced Line
Clearance Impact Caution
(RLC)
Imminent Line Clearance
Impact Caution (ILI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/TAWS-B
Page Alert
Annunciation
“Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
“Don’t Sink”
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
Table 6-21 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B compares the projected
flight path as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases.
The system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
EIS
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle/Line Clearance (RTC /ROC/RLC
respectively) and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle/Line Impact (ITI/IOI/ILI respectively).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
30
AFCS
Figure 6-89 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
ADDITIONAL TAWS-B ALERTING
APPENDICES
In addition to the FLTA alerting discussed previously, TAWS-B provides the following additional types of
alerts.
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
INDEX
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. The following figure shows the parameters for the alert.
346
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
2500
2000
EIS
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
500
Figure 6-90 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
600
AFCS
500
400
300
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
APPENDICES
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-91 PDA Alerting Threshold
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by visual annunciations. NCR alerting is
only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
EIS
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss or sink rate.
1000
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
AFCS
Figure 6-92 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
INDEX
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-93 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
348
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the TAWS-B “Five-hundred” voice alert is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft
descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain
(as determined by the GPS altitude and Terrain Database).
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the voice alert.
INHIBITING ALERTING
EIS
The pilot can manually inhibit FLTA alerts. If TAWS-B is installed, PDA alerts are also inhibited with FLTA
alerts.
TAWS-B System
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVT System
Figure 6-94 Alerting is Inhibited when Annunciation is displayed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B or Terrain-SVT Alerting:
1) Select the terrain page.
2) Press the Inhibit Softkey. Alerting is inhibited when softkey annunciator is green.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired inhibit or enable option and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
SYSTEM STATUS
TERRAIN-SVT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice
alert is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain
System Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
APPENDICES
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the
annunciation ‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ Page. The
voice alert “Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the
aircraft is within the database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/TerrainSVT Page Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
None
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
Voice Alert
TERRAIN TEST
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-22 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
TAWS-B
AFCS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
is issued at test completion. The pilot can also manually select a TAWS-B system test. The system test option
is unavailable when the ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
APPENDICES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
INDEX
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system
displays the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS
signal integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the voice alert,
“TAWS Available” .
350
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Test pass
None
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
None
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
TAWS TEST
EIS
No GPS position
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test in progress
TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/TAWS-B
Page Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-23 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic
Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) and TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are
shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Mode S TIS is disabled if another traffic system such as TAS or Automatic Dependent Surveillance-
Broadcast (ADS-B) is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses
the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is
updated every five seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic symbols within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000
feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS traffic with the symbology shown
in the following table.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
AFCS
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-24 TIS Traffic Symbols
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid amber circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic
is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on which traffic
can be displayed.
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
352
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic TIS is
operating:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
EIS
• PFD Maps
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Terrain-SVT option is installed and enabled.
See the Additional Features Section for details.
Enabling/disabling traffic overlays (MFD navigation maps):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the navigation map.
When traffic is enabled as a map overlay, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation
Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
APPENDICES
Figure 6-95 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the Inset Map or HSI Map.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
AFCS
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by
the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
APPENDICES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
INDEX
a) Press the Operate Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
354
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
EIS
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press to
Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
Figure 6-96 Traffic Map Page
TIS ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the right of the airspeed tape, flashes for five seconds, and remains
displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
AFCS
• The PFD Inset Map or HSI Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
355
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-97 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
AFCS
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TNA Mute Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
356
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
FAILED
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
DATA FAILED
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
TIS is unavailable or out of range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
UNAVAILABLE
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-25 TIS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Map Center
Traffic Overlay Status
Banner Annunciation Icon (Navigation Maps)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Mode
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
Description
TRFC FAIL
OPERATING
None
OPERATING
UNAVAILABLE
STANDBY
STANDBY
TIS is in Standby Mode.
UNIT FAILED
TRFC FAIL
The transponder has failed*
APPENDICES
NO DATA
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRFC FAIL
AFCS
Data is being received from the transponder,
but a failure is detected in the data stream*
Data is not being received from the
transponder*
TIS is operating and is receiving traffic data
from a data link.
TIS is operating, but the traffic service is
currently unavailable or is out of reception
range.
DATA FAILED
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-26 TIS Modes and Status Annunciations
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Standby or Operate Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper right
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed, as shown in the following table.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AGE MM:SS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC COAST
TRFC RMVD
AFCS
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-27 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
358
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TAS TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of traffic system limitations. Traffic systems require transponders of other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
aircraft to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due
to phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed
intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude
separation data or climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Mode-S TIS is disabled when another traffic system is installed.
NOTE: If Garmin GTX 345R transponder is installed, refer to the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(ADS-B) Traffic discussion for more information about ADS-B traffic displays.
NOTE: If an optional Honeywell KTA 870 TAS is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the
manufacturer for detailed information about that traffic system.
AFCS
The optional Garmin GTS 800 or Honeywell KTA 870 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight
crew situational awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also
provides visual annunciations and voice alerts to help the pilot visually acquire traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Garmin TAS is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders,
and up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest
threat potential can be displayed simultaneously.
No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
TAS THEORY OF OPERATION
APPENDICES
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system directly interrogates the transponders of other
aircraft in the vicinity. The traffic system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if
reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The traffic system then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure
rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts.
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin TAS surveillance system actively scans the airspace within ±10,000 feet of its altitude. Under
ideal conditions, the Garmin TAS scans transponder traffic up to 22 nm in the forward direction. The range
is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of the aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns.
In areas of greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
II) systems are detected, the on-board traffic system automatically reduces its interrogation transmitter power
(and therefore range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.
NOTE: The Garmin traffic system does not display traffic determined to be on the ground, including Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
C transponder equipped aircraft operating below 300’ AGL that is not climbing. However, if own aircraft
has ADS-B In capability, and is receiving traffic information from an ADS-B source (including ADS-R, ADS-B,
TIS-B), the system does display this traffic while operating in SURF Mode. Refer to the ADS-B Traffic Section
for more information.
If a Garmin GTX 33 ES transponder is installed, the system uses the following symbols to represent traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-28 TAS Symbol Description with GTX 33 ES Transponder
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If a Garmin GTX 345 transponder is installed with the TAS, the symbols in the following table depict traffic,
and include Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) information. Refer to the ADS-B Traffic
discussion later in this section for more information.
360
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Arrow points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information is beyond the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing. Arrow points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Arrow points in the direction of the aircraft track.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Arrow points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with ADS-B directional information. Arrow points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground
traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or
own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Table 6-29 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a solid amber circle or circle enclosing an arrow, alerts the crew to a
potentially hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria.
A TA that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the
screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or arrow, indicates the intruding aircraft is
within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
APPENDICES
Other, non-threat traffic, shown as an open white diamond or arrow, is displayed for traffic beyond six
nautical miles that is neither a TA or PA.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
INDEX
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Relative Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-98 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
NOTE: If an optional Honeywell KTA 870 TAS is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the
EIS
manufacturer for detailed information about its surveillance features.
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS (GARMIN TAS)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Garmin TAS automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting when the aircraft is more likely to be near an airport. The system uses Level A (less) sensitivity
when the height above terrain is at or below 2,000’ AGL. If the height above terrain is unavailable, Level A
sensitivity applies when the landing gear is extended, or the ground speed is less than 120 knots if the landing
gear position is unavailable. In all other conditions, Level B (higher) sensitivity applies.
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.2 NM.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.55 NM.
INDEX
Table 6-30 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
362
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: If an optional Honeywell KTA 870 TAS is installed, refer to the Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for information about voice alerts for that traffic system.
When the Garmin TAS detects a new TA, the following occur:
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing
EIS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
Table 6-31 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• A PFD map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-99 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: If an optional Honeywell KTA 870 TAS is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
manufacturer for information about applicable voice alerts for the system test.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify normal operation. The test takes approximately ten
seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on the traffic
maps.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If the aircraft has ADS-B In capability, the system announces “Traffic System Test”, and the test pattern
corresponds to the current aircraft heading. A climbing TA is shown to the west, level Other Non-Threat traffic
is shown to the northwest, and a descending proximity Advisory is in the northeast, relative to own aircraft. If
the system test passes, the traffic system enters standby mode, and no traffic failure annunciations are displayed
on the traffic maps.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft does not have ADS-B In capability, the test pattern is fixed and does not correspond to the
aircraft heading. If the system test passes, the system announces “TAS System Test Passed”. Otherwise the
system announces, “TAS System Test Failed”. When the system test is complete, the traffic system enters
Standby Mode.
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
5) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
1) With the Traffic system in Standby mode, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key.
364
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS Test Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-100 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Garmin TAS automatically changes from Standby to Operating mode eight seconds after
takeoff. The system also automatically changes from Operating to Standby mode 24 seconds after
landing.
When the avionics system initially receives power on the ground, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The
system must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
AFCS
Changing traffic system modes on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the Operate or TAS OPER or Normal Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in
the Traffic mode field.
APPENDICES
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in
the Traffic mode field.
Or:
1) With the Traffic Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2)
Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired mode.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. The pilot can adjust the map range with
the Joystick. A range indication appears on each range ring.
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the Traffic
Map Page.
EIS
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
AFCS
Figure 6-101 Traffic Map Page
Altitude Display Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic is
displayed. If traffic meets the criteria for a TA, it is also displayed even if it is outside of the selected volume
of airspace.
Changing the altitude range:
APPENDICES
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
INDEX
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to
2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
366
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in the previous step 2):
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
EIS
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, and rings on the map denote the ranges.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The following range options are available:
750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
1500 ft and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm (available with ADS-B or KTA 870)
APPENDICES
•
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
750 ft (with optional ADS-B)
AFCS
•
Flight ID Display
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page.
When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol on the Traffic
Map Page when this option is enabled.
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state).
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Trip Planning Page
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, the system shows a traffic status icon to
indicate traffic is enabled for display as well as the altitude display mode (‘Above’, ‘Below’, ‘Normal’, ‘Unres’).
Proximity
Advisory
APPENDICES
Traffic Advisory
INDEX
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
Figure 6-102 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
368
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays only Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels (relative altitude, vertical trend) are
shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
A traffic-only inset map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map appears on
the PFD. This map resembles the Traffic Map Page, and presents a heading up format. Traffic information
can also be overlaid on PFD navigation maps.
Enabling/disabling traffic overlay on PFD navigation maps:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Mode
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
Traffic System Test
Initiated
OPERATING
EIS
Operating
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Standby
FAIL
Traffic System Failed*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-33 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-32 Traffic Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-33 TAS Failure Annunciations
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
APPENDICES
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
INDEX
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-34 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
370
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic
control system. It offers improved surveillance services, both air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas
where radar coverage is ineffective due to terrain, or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. ADS-B is
comprised of three segments for the purposes of providing traffic information: ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R
(Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B includes the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail
Number, ICAO registration number, etc.), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
1090 ES
AFCS
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mode A/C
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
APPENDICES
Figure 6-103 ADS-B System
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ADS-B system operates on two frequencies: 1090 MHz and 978 MHz. Both frequencies provide the same
traffic information. An aircraft may be ADS-B In, Out, or participating on one or both frequencies, depending
on the installed equipment. The 1090 MHz frequency portion of ADS-B is known as 1090 Extended Squitter
(1090 ES). The 978 MHz portion of ADS-B is known as Universal Access Transceiver (UAT).
The optional Garmin GTX 33 ES transponder provides ADS-B Out functions using the 1090 ES data link, and
no ADS-B In traffic display is provided.
EIS
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder provides ADS-B Out functions using the 1090 ES data link. It
also performs ADS-B In functions using the UAT data link. For the GTX 345, this includes the reception of
Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) data link weather service, provided when the aircraft is receiving
data from a participating ground station; refer to the Data Link Weather section for more information about
FIS-B Weather.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking traffic data from one
link and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, if two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other is transmitting on 978 MHz, the ground station
retransmits the data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other as
traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For example, if another aircraft can only receive 978 MHz UAT information, it cannot directly ‘see’ another
aircraft sending only 1090 ES information aircraft unless an ADS-R ground station in the vicinity rebroadcasts
the 1090 ES data over the 978 MHz UAT frequency. This is also true for an aircraft when can only receive
1090 ES data; it would need an ADS-R ground station to ‘see’ another aircraft operating on the UAT frequency.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
AFCS
TIS-B provides a link between the secondary surveillance radar (SSR)-based system ATC uses and the ADSB-based system. When an ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B
ground station, the ground station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is
then included in the list of aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in SSR coverage, and the
other aircraft is also in SSR coverage, and is transmitting its altitude.
APPENDICES
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
ADS-B WITH TAS
INDEX
When the system is receiving ADS-B In traffic and with a TAS in Operating Mode, the system attempts to
match (or “correlate”) data the two traffic sources. When a correlation is made, the system displays the traffic
information for the tracked aircraft determined to be the most accurate. Any traffic that is not correlated
(i.e., only detected by one system but not the other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This may occur,
for example, if another aircraft is beyond the surveillance range of the TAS, but own aircraft is receiving
372
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
information via ADS-B for the other aircraft. The traffic correlation feature improves the accuracy of the traffic
displayed, while reducing the occurrence of displaying the same traffic for a given aircraft twice.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically be depicted as two aircraft
on the display.
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING (CSA)
EIS
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
When a TA occurs with is equipment, the displays a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation and provides a voice alert. This
annunciation and voice alert is the same as the alerts issues by the Garmin GTS 800 TAS discussed previously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to adjust the sensitivity of the CSA
algorithm in accordance with the following table:
Any
Any
Unavailable
Any
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
5
6
8
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
APPENDICES
Unavailable or
>2350
INDEX
Terminal
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
Any
Any
Approach
Any
Any
Vertical
Protected
Own Altitude Look-ahead
Threshold for Volume
(Feet)
time (sec)
Alert (feet)
(NM)
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
AFCS
4
4
4
5
5
GPS Phase of Flight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Sensitivity
Level
Table 6-35 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B traffic can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
EIS
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed
in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for
AIRB and SURF is depicted on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page, discussed later in this section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SURF Application On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Ground-based
vehicle
APPENDICES
Aircraft on the
ground
INDEX
Figure 6-104 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
374
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the following table.
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Symbol
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-36 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
OPERATION
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map
range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper right corner of the page.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRB Application On
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
EIS
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-105 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
3) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
4) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
APPENDICES
5) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
376
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFD. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern
is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Test Mode
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-106 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
AFCS
2) Select one of the following softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
APPENDICES
•
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in the previous step
2):
377
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
3) Press the ENT Key.
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
AFCS
Absolute
Motion Vectors
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-107 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
378
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Relative Motion
Vectors
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-108 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Motion Softkey.
3) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off: Disables the display of the motion vector.
AFCS
Or:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the Motion Softkey.
3) Press the Duration Softkey.
INDEX
4) Press a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the Traffic Map Page.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may include
the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service vehicle,
unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob. A cyan border appears on the first selected traffic symbol. Additional information appears
in a window in the lower-left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan border until another symbol is
selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The following range options are available:
•
500 feet
•
500 feet and 1000 feet
•
1000 feet and 2000 feet
•
2000 feet and 1 nm
•
1 and 2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps and IFR/VFR Charts. Refer to the
INDEX
APPENDICES
previous TAS discussions for information about these additional traffic displays.
380
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ADS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
NO TRK/HDG
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
FAILED
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B: TEST
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
ADS-B Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-32 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-37 ADS-B Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If the optional TAS fails, the display of ADS-B traffic (ADS-B In) also fails, unless a GTX 345R
transponder is installed. In this case, if the TAS fails, the display of ADS-B traffic continues even if the TAS
has failed.
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
AFCS
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Map Page Center
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Table 6-38 Traffic Failure Annunciations
APPENDICES
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
EIS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-39 Traffic Status Annunciations
The Traffic Map Page displays a white antenna icon to indicate the successful reception of ADS-B traffic
services from a ground station. A white-X over this icon indicates reception of ADS-B services is unavailable.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B Ground Station Reception Status
Receiving ADS-B traffic services from a ground
station
Not receiving ADS-B traffic services from a
ground station
Traffic Map Pane Icon
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-40 ADS-B Modes
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’
Page.
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
382
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-109 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface (SURF),
Airborne Alerts (CSA)
Status Message
Description
On
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The system is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The system is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of the number of minutes.
Available to Run
Not Available
EIS
Fault
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Not Configured
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-41 ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
384
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW
NOTE: The approved current pertinent flight manual and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) always
supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
EIS
The Garmin AFCS is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the system
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) GIA 63W. Flight
director commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination
in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric pitch trim capability
when the autopilot is not engaged.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS ON THE MFD
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
EIS
3
4
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
7
8
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
NAV Key
ALT Key
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
Pressing again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars.
If the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
VS Key
FLC Key
YD Key
HDG Key
APR Key
VNV Key
NOSE UP/
NOSE DN
Keys
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed and Flight Level Change
modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
AP Key
FD Key
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GDU 1055
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
11
APPENDICES
6
INDEX
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
386
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
The following controls used for the AFCS are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
Disengages the autopilot and yaw damper and interrupts pitch trim operation
CWS Switch
(Control Wheel
Steering)
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged
and synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch
(if not in a Vertical Navigation, Glideslope, or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll
Hold Mode)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP DISC/TRIM
INT Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect/Trim
Interrupt )
An AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch is red and is located on the pilot’s control.
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A CWS Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
Upon release of the CWS Switch, the flight director may establish new pitch and roll
references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GA Switch
(Go Around)
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach
when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/
LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Switch is located on the throttle.
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
An MEPT Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
AFCS
MEPT Switch
(Manual Electric
Pitch Trim)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM
contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts.
Pushing the MEPT ARM Switch disengages the autopilot, if currently engaged, but
does not affect yaw damper operation. The MEPT ARM Switch may be used to
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
APPENDICES
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are operated
simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than three
seconds, MEPT function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status
Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled until both sides of the
switch are inactivated.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BASIC AUTOPILOT OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Autopilot Engagement — The autopilot may be engaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit.
Annunciations regarding the engagement are indicated on the PFD.
This section provides an overview for autopilot engagement and disengagement. A more detailed description
follows in Section 7.4.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director Off — Upon engagement, the autopilot will be set to hold the
current attitude of the airplane, if the flight director was not previously on. In this case, ‘PIT’ and ‘ROL’ will
be annunciated.
EIS
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director On — If the flight director is on, the autopilot will smoothly
pitch and roll the airplane to capture the FD command bars. The prior flight director modes remain
unchanged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Autopilot Disengagement — The most common way to disconnect the autopilot is to press and release the
AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch, which is located on the control stick. An autopilot disconnect tone will be
heard and annunciated on the PFD. Other ways to disconnect the autopilot include:
– Pressing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Pressing the GA Switch (located on the left throttle)
– Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the event of unexpected autopilot behavior, pressing and holding the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch will
disconnect the autopilot and remove all power to the servos.
388
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (−15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Modes Selected
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
AFCS
Navigation**
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Key
ROL
ROL
ROL
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Go Around
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Switch
GA Switch
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Go Around
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in the following table (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight
director in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the
display by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS STATUS BOX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director
selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight
director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and
active in green.
Vertical Modes
EIS
Lateral Modes
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status Status
Armed
Active
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS Status Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command
Bars
AFCS
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
390
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
EIS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-3 Loss of GPS Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFD as a single cue.
The Command Bars do not override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move together vertically to
indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
AFCS
Command Bars
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-4 Command Bars
APPENDICES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.3 AFCS MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AFCS is capable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and Combination
of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
VERTICAL MODES
EIS
The following table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes. The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating
under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Mode
Description
Pitch Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Speed
Flight Level Change, IAS Hold
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed in IAS while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Reference
Range
Reference
Change
Increment
-15° to
+20°
0.5°
nnnn fpm
-2000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
90 to
210 kt
1 kt
Control Annunciation
(default)
PIT
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
AFCS
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
APPENDICES
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used
for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture
Mode is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
INDEX
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to
the nose-up/down limit.
392
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Pitch Reference
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
EIS
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of the VNV Target
Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed. The ALT SEL Knob is
used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture Mode becomes
active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTS’
annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The Selected
Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the Selected Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
394
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode.
Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude error is
less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
Changing the Altitude Reference
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
The Altitude Reference (shown in the AFCS Status Box) may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Altitude Reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch at the desired altitude (the new altitude is now the Altitude Reference)
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Switch
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Switch must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
AFCS
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Vertical
Speed
Reference
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
INDEX
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
396
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (IAS) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter).
When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude,
airspeed and altitude.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the Airspeed Reference
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Airspeed Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Airspeed Reference in this case, the CWS Switch must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
AFCS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
INDEX
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each Garmin AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer
to the combination modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
Mode
Description
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
EIS
Roll Hold
Heading Select
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ROL
25°
HDG
25°
GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Navigation, LOC Arm/Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
NAV
Key
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VOR
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
If no annunciation appears in the AFCS Status Box. The acceptable bank angle range is indicated in green along the Roll
Scale of the Attitude Indicator.
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
AFCS
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank
angle condition.
Figure 7-10 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
APPENDICES
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
INDEX
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
398
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Roll Reference
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Switch, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Switch.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
EIS
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Switch and hand-flying
the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected
Heading upon release of the CWS Switch.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading
changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
Heading Select
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
APPENDICES
Selected
Heading
Bug
Figure 7-11 Heading Select Mode
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands to fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision
GPS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft heading.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The annunciation “BC”
in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the
selected mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when
the NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral mode.
Figure 7-12 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed
prior to the automatic source switch.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
APPENDICES
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
INDEX
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
400
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Selected Course
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the CWS Switch and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when
the CWS Switch is released.
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars Indicate Right
Turn to Track GPS Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Figure 7-13 Navigation Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMBINATION MODES (VNV, APR, NAV, GA)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with their
corresponding controls and annunciations.
Mode
Description
EIS
Vertical Path Tracking
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Glideslope
Control
Captures and tracks descent
legs of an active vertical VNV Key
profile
Captures
the
Vertical
Navigation (VNV) Target
*
Altitude
Captures and tracks the
SBAS glidepath on approach
APR Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Captures
and
tracks
a localizer signal for NAV Key
backcourse approaches
Annunciation
ALTV
GP
GS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically
armed)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around**
25° Capture
10° Track
BC
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
GPS
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source APR Key
(GPS, VOR, LOC)
VAPP
25° Capture
10° Track
LOC
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the
air
Reference
Range
VPTH
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
GA
Button
GA
7°
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude.
**Go Around mode disengages the autopilot unless a compatible lift computer is installed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-5 Flight Director Combination Modes
402
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
NOTE: Vertical Path Tracking Mode is only applicable to aircraft equipped with a VNV Key.
AFCS
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Switch.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable,
the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and
the descent is not captured.
EIS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation
Status Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation,
and vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta.
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
APPENDICES
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Capture
INDEX
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as appropriate.
404
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VNV Target
Altitude
EIS
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-16 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
AFCS
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
APPENDICES
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.
EIS
Figure 7-17 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
NOTE: VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is only applicable to aircraft equipped with a VNV Key.
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
AFCS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1
minute” is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed
once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
INDEX
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
406
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-18 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
EIS
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
AFCS
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the
CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active
lateral mode). If the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
APPENDICES
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Figure 7-19 GPS Approach Mode Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC
Approach Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:w
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
AFCS
4) Press the APR Key.
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
APPENDICES
Changing the Selected Course
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
INDEX
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when
the CWS Button is released.
408
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (SBAS ONLY)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Switch.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glidepath Mode is available only when SBAS is available. Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based
glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode (SBAS Only):
EIS
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance or vertical descent angle (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded
into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint
not in the flight plan).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V should be flown to an MDA, until visual with the
landing surface, even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with
vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
AFCS
Figure 7-20 Glidepath Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• A GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
APPENDICES
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Approach
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
LPV Approach
Active
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 7-21 Glidepath Mode
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
AFCS
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
INDEX
4) Press the APR Key.
410
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Figure 7-22 Glideslope Mode Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope
Mode Active
EIS
Approach
Mode Active
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 7-23 Glideslope Mode
AFCS
BACKCOURSE MODE (BC)
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: In order to Arm a LOC back course the aircraft heading must be within 75 degrees of the localizer
back course.
APPENDICES
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be
selected by pressing the NAV Key. Backcourse Mode is armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when the
mode is selected. If the CDI is less than one dot, Backcourse Mode is automatically captured when the NAV
Key is pressed. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation
when in Backcourse Mode.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Backcourse
Mode Active
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
Changing the Selected Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.
AFCS
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
412
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GO AROUND (GA) MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and
arms Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts
to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or CWS Switch) result in reversion to
Pitch and Roll Hold modes.
Go Around
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-25 Go Around Modes
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the approved current pertinent flight manual for specific instructions regarding emergency
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
procedures.
The Beechcraft G58 autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic
flight control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the
flight director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort
required by the pitch servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
EIS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec
by the yaw damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT CONTROL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
AFCS
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
APPENDICES
YAW AXIS
INDEX
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns.
414
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Switch to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD Key is pressed,
the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged). Autopilot and yaw
damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’ and
‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
EIS
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw Damper
Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-26 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the YD Key is pressed, the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot and the yaw
damper annunciator light is illuminated.
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Switch disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. CWS activity has no effect on yaw damper engagement.
AFCS
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
Control Wheel Steering
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
APPENDICES
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DISENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch, AP Key on the MFD, GA
Switch, or MEPT ARM Switch. Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow
‘AP’ annunciation and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert.
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pushing the AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch or YD Key disengages both the yaw damper and the autopilot.
When the yaw damper and autopilot are manually disengaged, both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow
and flash for 5 seconds and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert is generated.
Figure 7-29 Yaw Damper Disengagement
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may be cancelled by pushing the MEPT ARM
or AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch (AP DISC/TRIM INT Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC/TRIM INT or
MEPT ARM Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
416
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.5 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS CAS MESSAGES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations in Table 7-6 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFDs above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AFCS Status
Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-31 AFCS Status Annunciation
Rudder Mistrim Right
RUDñ
Rudder Mistrim Left
œRUD
Aileron Mistrim Right
AILñ
Aileron Mistrim Left
œAIL
Elevator Mistrim Down
¤ELE
Elevator Mistrim Up
£ELE
Pitch Trim Failure
Description
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction. Aircraft rudder
retrim after substantial pitch and power changes required.
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction. May indicate a
failure of the pitch trim servo or trim system.
YAW
YD control failure; AP also inoperative
Roll Failure
ROLL
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
PTCH
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
AFCS
AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available
PFT
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests
as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their
power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
PFT
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Preflight Test
APPENDICES
Yaw Damper Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
AFCS
PTRM
(or stuck MEPT Switch)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alert Condition
Table 7-6 AFCS Status Alerts
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Overspeed protection is provided to limit the flight director’s
pitch command in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode reference for the
selected vertical mode without exceeding Vne.
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP modes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When Overspeed Protection is active, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed Indicator,
flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted
to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
Figure 7-32 Overspeed Annunciation
AFCS
UNDERSPEED PROTECTION
Underspeed Protection is available when the optional Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) system is
installed and the autopilot is on. It is designed to protect the airplane from stalls.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed (specific to each flap setting), a yellow MINSPD
annunciation will appear above the airspeed indicator. If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed
Protection functionality depends on which vertical flight director mode is selected. For the purpose of this
discussion, the vertical flight director modes can be divided into two categories: Those in which it is important
to maintain altitude for as long as possible (altitude-critical modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is
less crucial (non-altitude critical modes). In both modes, the altitude preselect is set above the current altitude
and power/thrust is inadequate to cause the aircraft to climb to the desired altitude.
418
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-33 Underspeed Annunciation
ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA, FLC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
As the aircraft slows, within 5 to 10 seconds from reaching stall warning, an aural “AIRSPEED” alert will
sound. If the aircraft decelerates to stall warning, the lateral and vertical flight director modes will change
from active to armed, and the autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft to pitch down and the wings
to level.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound every five seconds and a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE”
annunciation will appear to the right of the vertical speed indicator. The pitch down force will continue until
the aircraft reaches a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the IAS at which stall warning turns off, plus two
knots.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 7-34 Underspeed Protect Active Annunciation
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
INDEX
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to above the IAS at which stall warning turns
off, plus two knots, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference.
The vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active. The pitch attitude may be very
high as the aircraft climbs back to the desired altitude. This high pitch angle and rate of climb is intended to
minimize time spent below the desired altitude.
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (VS, VNAV, IAS, PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the airspeed trend vector reaches a predetermined airspeed (specific to each flap setting), a single
aural “AIRSPEED” will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition. If the aircraft
decelerates to an IAS below the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT
ACTIVE” annunciation will appear to the right of the vertical speed indicator. The vertical flight director
mode will change from active to armed, and the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch down until reaching
a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to an IAS above the minimum commandable
autopilot airspeed, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference. The
vertical flight director mode will change from armed to active.
420
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Satellite Telephone and SMS Messaging Services
• ChartView, FliteCharts® and IFR/VFR electronic charts
• Flight Data Logging
• AOPA™ or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
• Connext® Setup
• SurfaceWatch™
• Electronic Checklists
• SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Entertainment
• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™)
EIS
• SafeTaxi® Diagrams
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional ChartView, FliteCharts and IFR/VFR charts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures
charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or
FliteCharts may be configured in the system, but not both.
The AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional SurfaceWatch feature provides voice and visual annunciations to aid in maintaining situational
awareness and avoid potential runway incursions during ground and air operations in the airport environment.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment
choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
AFCS
Iridium Telephone Services and SMS messaging is an optional subscription service offered through Garmin
®
Connext and Iridium Satellite LLC. Voice and SMS messaging communications are through the Iridium Satellite
Network. Data communications are through Iridium Data Services, or a wireless network (Wi-Fi) when the
aircraft is on the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Connext allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth connection between
the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
APPENDICES
Electronic checklists allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure for a particular phase of flight.
The Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (Garmin ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside
the normal flight envelope
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• PFD Maps
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
422
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport
Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the
softkey is pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
markings and airport feature labels. Pressing the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back to
the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Settings Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 CHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Electronic charts that resemble the paper versions of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts (FliteCharts)
and Jeppesen terminal procedures charts (ChartView) can be displayed on the MFD. When the databases for
both chart types are purchased and loaded in the system, the desired charts brand, or source, can be selected for
viewing. The active chart source for a particular procedure is shown on the information pane under Source.
Selecting Preferred Charts Source:
1) While viewing a chart press the MENU Softkey to display the Page Menu Options.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup menu option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Preferred Charts Source option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts, ChartView).
Preferred Charts Source Option
Chart Setup Option
AFCS
Figure 8-2 Preferred Charts Source
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Source
Figure 8-3 Chart Source
424
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
EIS
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading
is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale
areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inset Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Area
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
APPENDICES
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
190-02181-01 Rev. A
INDEX
• Approaches
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Show Approach Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Figure 8-5 Chart Options Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-6 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-7 Unable To Display Chart Banner
When a chart is not available by pressng the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
INDEX
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
426
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Chart Scale
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
INDEX
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank. Once the
desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If
the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not
Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Dekalk-Peachtree, GA (KPDK)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘MAP – Chart + Navigation Map’ page.
EIS
Pressing the Info Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is shown in
magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries. AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using the FMS Knob,
the system softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering information;
the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline
Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft
Current
Position
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Information Page, Info View, Full Screen Width
INDEX
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.
428
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-10 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from Info View
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When
NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM
Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the
NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
APPENDICES
CHART OPTIONS
- Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the Chart Options level.
- Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
429
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-11 Approach Information Page, ALL View
- Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
- Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
- Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
AFCS
- If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the Fit WDTH Softkey changes
the chart size to fit the available screen width.
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Pressing the ROT CCW Softkey rotates the displayed chart counter clockwise in 90 degree increments.
- Pressing the ROT CW Softkey rotates the displayed chart clockwise in 90 degree increments.
APPENDICES
- Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the information windows (Airport,
Info).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
430
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys. The full screen
view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Full Screen On Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-12 Page Menus
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-13 Page Menu Chart Setup
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
5) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-14 Arrival Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-15 Arrival Information Page, Night View
432
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
EIS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
433
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Off-Scale
Areas
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
Figure 8-16 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
APPENDICES
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and Go
Back. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
- Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
INDEX
- Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: All, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and Back.
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
434
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Charts.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
EIS
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner NO AVAILABLE CHARTS appears on the screen. The NO AVAILABLE CHARTS banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-17 No Available Charts Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-18 Unable To Display Chart Banner
AFCS
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
APPENDICES
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
EIS
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the sytem softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE,
and the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the Info Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info Softkey has no effect.
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info Softkey. When the Info Box is
selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data if a data link weather receiver is installed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (Airport, Info).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Info Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. When the Info Box is selected the System softkeys are
blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT
Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
INDEX
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
436
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
- Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the Chart Options level.
- Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Pressing the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
- Pressing the ROT CCW Softkey rotates the displayed chart counter clockwise in 90 degree increments.
EIS
- Pressing the ROT CW Softkey rotates the displayed chart clockwise in 90 degree increments.
- Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the Full Screen and Color Scheme Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
APPENDICES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
IFR/VFR CHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a high altitude
IFR chart, if installed. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and setup on the Navigation
Map, but the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only the following items will be
overlaid on the chart:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent information)
• Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
• Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
• Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
• Flight Plan Legs
• Track Vector
• Runway Extension
• Missed Approach Preview
• Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
• Visual Reporting Points
• VNAV Constraints
• Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected on either
the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on the Navigation
Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
AFCS
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according to the
range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC) are available, a
range of 5 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased below 5 nm, the system will
automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a ‘gray circle of
uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere within the range of
the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and current zoom range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. IFR/VFR charts may be viewed
by selecting the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
438
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VFR Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-19 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
Selecting IFR Low, IFR High, VFR Charts:
1) Select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the VFR, IFR Low, or IFR High Softkey to display the desired chart.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Select ‘Display VFR’, ‘Display IFR Low’ or ‘Display IFR High’ to display the desired chart.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
IFR Low Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
EIS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
Figure 8-20 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
AFCS
IFR High Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
INDEX
Figure 8-21 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
440
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association™ (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is
viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information for the airport closest to
the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, press the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-22 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 SURFACEWATCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The SafeTaxi database must be available to provide information regarding taxiways, aprons and
other objects in the airport environment.
The SurfaceWatch™ feature provides visual annunciations to help the flight crew maintain situational awareness
and avoid potential runway incursions and excursions during ground and air operations in the airport environment. The SurfaceWatch feature is comprised of the following key components:
EIS
• Alert Annunciations
-Taxiway Takeoff
-Runway Too Short (during takeoff or landing)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
-Check Runway (during takeoff or landing)
-Taxiway Landing
• Runway distance remaining
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Provides information on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) that contains runway and taxiway information that
changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment.
The SurfaceWatch feature is not available in Reversionary Mode.
Inhibiting/uninhibiting SurfaceWatch:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor..
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SurfaceWatch field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to toggle the SurfaceWatch alerts on or off.
AFCS
INFORMATION BOX
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SurfaceWatch™ Information Box is displayed on the PFD. It contains runway and taxiway information
that dynamically changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment. The information that is
displayed in the Information Box is the aircraft’s relative position to nearby aprons, taxiways, and runways.
There are three components to the SurfaceWatch™ Information Box. These components are Currently
Occupied, Approaching, and Crossing Runways.
APPENDICES
Crossing Runways
Currently Occupied
Approaching
INDEX
Figure 8-23 Information Types Displayed in the Information Box
442
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CURRENTLY OCCUPIED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘ON’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway. The aircraft is
currently ‘ON’ runway 04 right (RWY 04R). The remaining runway distance is also shown when the aircraft
is situated on and aligned with a runway.
If the aircraft is airborne and approaching an airport, ‘AIRBORNE TO’ and the destination airport identifier
will be displayed.
Information regarding non-manuevering areas not labeled on the SafeTaxi diagram will not be displayed.
APPROACHING COMPONENT
EIS
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘APPROACHING’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway. The
aircraft is currently ‘APPROACHING’ taxiway E (TWY E). The distance to the taxiway is also shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the aircraft is taxiing and approaching an intersection of multiple taxiways, the taxiway identifiers
will be listed in order of proximity and the distance to the nearest is displayed.
When the aircraft is taxiing and crossing an intersection of multiple taxiways, ‘CROSSING’ will be displayed
and no distance will be shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CROSSING RUNWAYS
This component lists the runways, from closest to furthest, that are ‘CROSSING’ the runway the aircraft
currently occupies. The distance to each runway is also shown in order of closest distance. Runways behind
the aircraft are not depicted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Crossing Runways component is shown in conjunction with the Currently Occupied component of
the Information Box.
ALERTS
SurfaceWatch Alert
Annunciation
“Runway too short”
“Check runway”
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway)
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from, or landing on, a runway with a length
less than needed as entered by the crew.
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from, or landing on, a runway different than
that entered by the crew.
Issued when the aircraft is landing on a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway).
APPENDICES
“Taxiway”
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Associated Voice
Alert
“Taxiway”
AFCS
The SurfaceWatch alert annunciations are displayed in the central portion of the PFD. The alert annunciations
are accompanied by a corresponding voice alert.
Table 8-1 SurfaceWatch Alert Annunciations
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAKEOFF ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Taxiway Takeoff
The Takeoff phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to issue
Takeoff Alerts.
The Taxiway Takeoff alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a non-runway (e.g. a
taxiway) or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
In addition to the visual and voice alerts, the Information Box contains a textual description of the currently
occupied taxiway (or other maneuvering area) and potentially the next area (apron or maneuvering area) to
be occupied (based on aircraft heading and the airport geometry) and the distance to that area.
Figure 8-24 Typical Taxiway Information Displayed in the Information Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Runway Too Short
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Runway Too Short (during takeoff) alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a runway
and the remaining runway length is less than the required length. The insufficient runway length condition
is determined based on aircraft current position during the takeoff roll and the required takeoff distance
information entered on the Takeoff Data Screen.
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway from which the aircraft is
taking off, the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in the Takeoff
Data.
AFCS
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will contain a textual description of the
currently occupied runway and the remaining runway length as shown in the following figure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-25 Typical Runway Information Displayed in the Information Box
Check Runway
APPENDICES
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a runway that does not
match the departure runway entered in the Takeoff Data Screen.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box contains a textual description of the currently
occupied runway.
LANDING ALERTS
INDEX
The On-Final phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to issue
Landing Alerts.
444
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Taxiway Landing
The Taxiway Landing alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway)
or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier
and the text “APPROACHING TWY” to indicate a non-runway landing is being attempted.
EIS
Figure 8-26 Typical Information Displayed During a Taxiway Landing Alert
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway Too Short
The Runway Too Short alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway where the remaining
runway length is less than the required landing runway length entered in the Landing Data Screen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway with which aircraft is aligned,
the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in entered in the Landing
Data Screen.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier
and the text “APPROACHING REMAINING” to indicate a the remaining runway length as indicated in the
following figure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-27 Typical Information Displayed During a Runway Too Short Alert
Check Runway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway that does not match the
arrival runway specified in the Landing Data.
Additionally, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier, the runway with which
the aircraft is aligned, and the distance to the runway (see following Figure).
APPENDICES
Figure 8-28 Typical Information Displayed During a Check Runway Alert
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SURFACEWATCH SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Origin/destination airport, runway and distance data entered integrates with SurfaceWatch technology to
alert the flight crew to a runway too short for takeoff/landing, or to advise of a potential taxiway takeoff/landing. The runway selected in SurfaceWatch Setup appears on the airport diagram in cyan, and appears outlined in
cyan on the synthetic vision representation of the runway on the PFD.
Entering origin/destination airport:
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the Origin or Destination Airport field.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to input the desired Origin or Destination Airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting origin/destination runway:
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the Runway or Landing Runway field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired available Runway or Landing Runway. As the small FMS Knob is
turned, the preview of the selected runway or landing runway is also displayed.
Selecting required takeoff/landing distance:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the REQD Takeoff DIS or REQD Landing DIS field.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the required takeoff or landing distance. Upon pressing the FMS Knob and
committing the required takeoff or landing distance, the Runway Length field will turn amber if an insufficient
runway length exists.
446
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-29 SurfaceWatch Setup Page (MFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-30 SurfaceWatch Info and Cyan Runway Outline (PFD)
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation, ChartView,
SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable during a period that
extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table below for the various FliteCharts
Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date and disables date varies for each database.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
Table 8-2 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
AFCS
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current. Yellow text,
such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no longer viewable and
have expired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database time critical information can also be found on the ‘Aux - System Status’ page. The database Region,
Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the current
subscription period.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
APPENDICES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database information is shown.
INDEX
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
448
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
YYTI
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
YYII
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
EIS
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.
Example Power-up Page Display Text
Database Cycle Number Format
Revision Cycle
Not Applicable
YYBI
56 days
YYSI
56 days
YYDI
56 days
YYII
28 days
YYII
14 days
YYII
28 days
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
YYTI
AFCS
Not Applicable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
YYMI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
28 days
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
YYII
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 Database Startup, Format and Cycle
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the SXM Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The SiriusXM Data Link Receiver can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio
entertainment services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on
the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver, not the GDL 69 SXM.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69ASXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
AFCS
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ page.
APPENDICES
4) Press the Info Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
INDEX
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
450
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio
Radio ID
Data
Radio ID
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather
Products
Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-31 XM Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
AFCS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Press the Radio Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
APPENDICES
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category. Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the Channel Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
EIS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the Channel Softkey.
2) Press the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Category Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
AFCS
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
PRESETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
APPENDICES
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the Presets
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
2) Press the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the
last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Pressing the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset
channels.
INDEX
3) Press any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Press the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
452
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the Volume Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
EIS
SiriusXM Radio volume may also be adjusted on each passenger headset.
Muting SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Press the Mute Softkey again to unmute the audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND SMS MESSAGING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: An account must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice/SMS.
The GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service,
and Short Message Service (SMS).
The telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headsets.
EIS
REGISTERING WITH GARMIN CONNEXT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the
‘Aux- System Status’ Page. Contact Garmin at www.flyGarmin.com.
DISABLE/ENABLE IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
Iridium telephone and data communications may be turned on or off by performing these simple steps.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Disabling/enabling telephone and low speed data services:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-32 Report Status Page
3) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed.
INDEX
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
454
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-33 Select Disable Iridium Transmission
5) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.
6) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 3, then select ‘Enable Iridium Transceiver’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and monitoring of
telephone functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
Viewing the Telephone Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Telephone’ or ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page.
3) If necessary, press the Phone Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
AFCS
The phone status display gives a graphical representation of the current disposition of voice and/or data
transmissions. ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
EIS
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone is disabled
AFCS
Phone is reserved for data transmission
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
Other phone is on hold
APPENDICES
Phones are connected
Table 8-4 Telephone Symbols
CONTACTS
INDEX
The names, telephone number, and email addresses can be saved in a list of contacts for easy use when
making telephone calls.
456
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a new contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
2) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘New Entry’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves the ‘Name’ field of the ‘Contact Details’ window.
4) Enter the desired name of the new contact. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the
MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Phone Number’ field.
EIS
6) Enter the desired telephone number. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
7) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Email’ field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Enter the desired email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
9) Press the ENT Key. The Save button is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Press the ENT Key. The new contact entry is added to the list of saved contacts.
Deleting a contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Delete Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the selected contact.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-34 Editing a Contact
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Editing a contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone Page’ displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
3) Press the Edit Softkey. The cursor is placed in the ‘Name’ field. Enter the desired changes. Entry can be
accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the
MFD.
4) Press the ENT Key when each field is complete. The Save Button is now highlighted.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to save the changes.
INCOMING CALLS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed and an
aural alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. If the incoming call is an Iridium network call, Iridium will be
displayed. The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the pop-up
alert, a ringing phone symbol will be displayed to the right of the MFD page title. Also, the voice alert
“Incoming Call” will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Answering an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the Answer Softkey on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
pressing the Answer Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
AFCS
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Pressing
the Phone Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page allowing additional call information to be viewed
before answering.
Muting incoming call alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
458
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OUTGOING CALLS
Making an external call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the Dial Softkey on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Iridium’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor has now moved to the phone number entry field.
Country Code
870
8810 or 8811
8812 or 8813
8816 or 8817
8818 or 8819
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite System
Inmarsat
ICO
Ellipso
Iridium
Globalstar
EIS
The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit to an external phone:
Country Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number. The following country codes may be used
when calling other satellite telephone systems.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-35 Enter Phone Number
5) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by pressing the number softkeys on the MFD.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted.
459
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-36 Make the Call
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number.
Figure 8-37 System is Making the Connection
INDEX
When the phone is answered, the connection is established. To exit the call, press the Hangup Softkey.
460
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-38 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
Making an external call from the cockpit by using the Contact List:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired contact name in the list of contacts.
4) Press the Call Softkey. The external call is initiated and the number associated with the contact name is dialed.
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
AFCS
Placing a call on hold:
Press the Hold Softkey on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call. The following figure illustrates a call between the cockpit
and an external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold. Press the Hold Softkey again to
resume the call.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
461
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-39 Cockpit Phone on Hold
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address. Senders should address text messages to aircraft by entering [aircraft Iridium
phone number]@msg.iridium.com.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
AFCS
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ or ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
462
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-40 Text Messaging Page
Message Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
AFCS
Saved text message, draft not sent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
System is sending text message
Text message has been sent
APPENDICES
System failed to send text message
Predefined text message
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
INDEX
Table 8-5 Text Message Symbols
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed when
a new text message is received.
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-41 New Text Message Received
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the View Softkey to view the message. Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up
window and leave the text message unopened. Pressing the Ignore All Softkey will extinguish the popwindow and ignore all future incoming text messages. Pressing the SMS Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Text
Messaging’ Page.
Figure 8-42 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
INDEX
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
464
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-43 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the Reply Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Sending a new text message:
APPENDICES
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
465
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-44 Composing a New Text Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The SMS Text Message Draft Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press
the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by
pressing the Symbols Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
AFCS
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
5) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Send Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the Save Softkey to save the message in
Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the Cancel Softkey to delete the message.
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
APPENDICES
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
a predefined message.
Creating a predefined text message:
INDEX
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
466
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 8-45 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined Messages view is now displayed.
4) Press the New Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-46 Composing a Predefined Message
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘Title’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys
on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by
pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
8) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
9) Press the Save Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Pressing the Cancel
Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Cancel Drafting Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
Sending a predefined text message:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, select the New Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press
the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by
pressing the Symbols Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
468
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-47 Predefined Message Softkey Shown When Composing a Message
4) Press the Predefined Softkey. The Predefined Message Menu Window is displayed.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the Send Softkey to transmit the message.
AFCS
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Showing Inbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Inbox Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
469
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-48 Text Message Inbox
Showing Outbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Outbox Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
AFCS
Showing Draft messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Drafts Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
APPENDICES
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
INDEX
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
470
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Time Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
EIS
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Type Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing messages sorted by address:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Address Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing the content of a text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, select the desired message box.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the VIEW Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Press the ENT Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Message content is displayed.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
471
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-49 Viewing Message Content
5) To close the text message, press the Close Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MRK Read Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
APPENDICES
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
472
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Deleting a message:
EIS
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the Delete Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.8 CONNEXT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream 510 device for a Bluetooth
connection between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
EIS
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the system in order to use the various functions. Pairing is accomplished
by first placing the system in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The system is ‘discoverable’
whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the mobile device and the Garmin Pilot
application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot
application.
Viewing the Connext Setup Page
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Connext Setup page.
Changing the Bluetooth Name
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
3) Enter the desired name by using the large FMS Knob to select the character field, and the small FMS Knob
select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows the system to automatically
connect to a previously paired device when detected.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
474
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
• Autopilot On/Off
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
• Date
+North)
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• Time
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• GPS altitude (MSL)
+East)
• GPS fix
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• HSI source
• GPS vertical alert limit
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Selected course
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Com1/Com2 frequency
level
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
level
• CDI deflection
• OAT (degrees C)
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• True airspeed (knots)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Manifold Pressure
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Bearing to next waypoint
• Ground Track (degrees
(degrees)
magnetic)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
INDEX
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
476
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Local Date
YYMMDD
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
log_170510_104506_KIXD.csv
Figure 8-50 Log File Format
EIS
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the airframe. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
described in the approved current pertinent flight manual or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements
document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
EIS
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure
on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into
the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page messages display
‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the Checklist Softkey is not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Group’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
APPENDICES
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
INDEX
10) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
478
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the EMER Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
EIS
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the Return Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
9) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.11 ELECTRONIC STABILITY & PROTECTION (ESP™)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) is an optional feature that is intended to discourage the exceedance of
attitude and established airspeed parameters. This feature will only function when the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL
and the autopilot is not engaged.
ESP engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, and Vne) beyond the normal flight
parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control surface
to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control movement
in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed, the force increases (up to an established
maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude and/or
airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant up
to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When ESP has been engaged for more than ten seconds (cumulative; not necessarily consecutive seconds) of a
20-second interval, the autopilot is automatically engaged with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing the aircraft
into level flight. An aural “Engaging Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director mode annunciation will indicate
‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding either the Control Wheel Steering (CWS) or Autopilot
Disconnect (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing the CWS or AP DISC switch, ESP force will again be applied,
provided aircraft attitude and/or airspeed exceed their respective engagement limits. ESP can also be overridden by
overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque limit.
ESP can be enabled or disabled on the ‘Aux-System Setup’ Page on the MFD.
Enabling/Disabling ESP:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, press the SETUP 2 Softkey to display the ‘Aux-System Setup 2’ Page. If the ‘Aux-System Setup 2’ is
already displayed, proceed to step 4.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the Stability & Protection field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
INDEX
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will engage (see
following figure). As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move
480
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
to 30°, as shown in the following figure. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as
roll attitude decreases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-51 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Before ESP Engage
After ESP Engage
Figure 8-52 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
APPENDICES
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in the following figure. The
force increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended
to encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP
will disengage at 30°.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
º
30
20º
10º
0º
10º
20º
5º
90º
90º
EIS
75º
75º
º
60
60
º
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
º
º
45
4
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-53 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°
(following figure).
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-54 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
APPENDICES
ESP engages at 20° nose-up and 25° nose-down. Once ESP is engaged, it will apply opposing force between
20° and 50° nose-up and between 25° and 50° nose-down, as indicated in the following figure. Maximum
opposing force is applied between 25° and 50° nose-up and between 30° and 50° nose-down.
INDEX
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
conditions.
482
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
45˚
40˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
45˚
15˚
10˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
20˚
20˚
25˚
25˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
15˚
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20˚
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
20˚
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
25˚
EIS
25˚
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
50˚
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
50˚
35˚
40˚
40˚
45˚
45˚
50˚
50˚
AFCS
Figure 8-55 ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
Exceeding Vne will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high airspeed
condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.
APPENDICES
LOW AIRSPEED PROTECTION
Low speed protection is provided as part of the ESP feature. When the stall warning system determines a
stall condition is imminent, ESP will engage, applying force in the direction necessary to lower the nose of the
aircraft.
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
STALL PROTECTION
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Stall protection is provided as part of the ESP feature. ESP will engage when a stall warning has been active
for at least one half second, applying a force in the direction necessary to lower the nose of the aircraft. ESP will
disengage when the stall warning has deactivated.
484
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SIRIUSXM DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page for GDL 69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or account
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver or
Iridium Transceiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDL 69A SXM
Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent SiriusXM
radio from being heard
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-6 GDL 69/69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages
APPENDICES
WAITING FOR DATA...
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LOADING
AFCS
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
NO SIGNAL
INDEX
190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
485
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Blank Page
486
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58 Series
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• CAS Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert
levels described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical
Speed Indicator. All Crew Alerting System (CAS) annunciations can be displayed simultaneously in the CAS
Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are
not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
EIS
• Messages Window: The Messages Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
Pressing the Messages Softkey displays the Messages Window. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time
removes the Messages Window from the display. When the Messages Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can
be used to scroll through the alert message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Messages Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The Messages Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (Warning,
Caution, or Advisory). By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged. The
softkey label then returns to Messages. If alerts are still present, the Messages label is displayed in white with
black text. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is
supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
AFCS
CAS
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Messages
Window
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 Alerting System
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for corrective pilot actions.
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are considered already
acknowledged. They do not flash or trigger the Master Warning or Master Caution.
EIS
The Alerting System uses three alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory)
and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its
urgency and on required action:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) Window is located on the right side of the PFD. Warning messages cannot
be scrolled through and remain at the top of the CAS display. The scroll bar appears if more caution and
advisory messages exist than can be displayed at once or if messages have been scrolled off the display. The
CAS softkeys also become available.
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Warning: This level of alert requires immediate attention. When a new warning CAS message appears in the
CAS Window, it flashes (inversely red on white) in conjunction with the Warning Softkey (see Figure A-2) and
is accompanied by a repeating triple chime. Pressing the Warning Softkey acknowledges all flashing warning
messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once acknowledged, warning messages are shown in red text and are
displayed until the issue is corrected. Warning voice alerts repeat continuously until acknowledged by pressing
the Warning Softkey.
AFCS
Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. When a new caution message appears in the CAS Window, it is shown in black on amber inverse
video in conjunction with the Caution Softkey (see Figure A-2) and is accompanied by a double chime.
Pressing the Caution Softkey Indicator acknowledges all amber messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once
acknowledged, caution messages are displayed until the issue is corrected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Advisory: This level of alert provides general information. When a new white advisory appears on the CAS
display, it is shown in black on white inverse video in conjunction with the Advisory Softkey (see Figure A-2)
and may be accompanied by a single chime.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Some CAS messages can be display in more than one alert level group. For example, a message might
display as both a warning and a caution, but cannot appear more than once at any given time (unless the CAS
is being tested). If the received signals justify multiple priorities for a certain message, the message is displayed
for the higher priority condition. When graduating to a higher priority, the message flashes and requires
new acknowledgment. When degrading to a lower priority condition, the message moves to the top of the
appropriate grouping, but does not require new acknowledgment.
488
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS
Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-2 CAS Message Prioritization
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (Message Softkey Labels)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS ANNUNCIATIONS
Red annunciation window text signifies warnings, amber signifies cautions, and white signifies advisories.
See the current version of the pertinent flight manual for a list of CAS annunciations and for recommended
pilot action.
AFCS
DISPLAY INHIBITS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., L FUEL QTY warning and L FUEL
QTY caution) only the higher alert level is displayed.
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
AUDIO ALERTING SYSTEM TEST
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. Should the #1 GIA 64W fail,
audio and voice alerts are not generated. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX - System Status
Page.
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the Ann Test Softkey.
EIS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or an
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red amber ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The current version of the
pertinent flight manual takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
490
Message
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 SERVICE – ADC1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
AHRS1 CAL – AHRS1 calibration version
error. Srvc req’d.
AHRS1 CONFIG – AHRS1 config error.
Config service req’d.
Comments
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check the current
version of the pertinent flight manual limitations. The system should be serviced.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
GDC1 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The GDC1 should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS calibration version error. The system should be serviced.
AHRS configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GMA has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
A failure has been detected in carbon monoxide detector has been detected. The
detector may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
A failure in the carbon monoxide detector has been detected. The system should be
serviced.
The COM1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced
COM 1 and/or COM 2 calibration version error. Check COM calibration.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM 1 and/or COM 2 current is low. Check COM current.
COM 1 and/or COM 2 has an internal fault.
APPENDICES
COM 1 and/or COM 2 has a reduced transmission power.
The COM 1 and/or COM 2 has a synthesizer lock fault.
The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
EIS
AUDIO MANIFEST - Audio software
mismatch, communication halted.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
CO DET SRVC – The carbon
monoxide detector needs service.
CO DET FAIL – The carbon monoxide
detector is inoperative.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM #[1, 2] INOP - CAL - Check
COM calibration.
COM #[1, 2] INOP - CRNT - Check
COM current.
COM #[1, 2] INOP - NTRL - Com
internal fault.
COM #[1, 2] REDUCED TX POWER COM synthesizer lock fault.
COM #[1, 2] INOP - SYNTH - COM
synthesizer lock fault.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SERVICE – AHRS1 Magneticfield model needs update.
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COPILOT RADIOS MUTED – Copilot
radios are muted.
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
AFCS
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify stored airways.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
APPENDICES
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
mismatch.
INDEX
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
mismatch.
DIG GMA1 MANIFEST – DIG GMA
1 software mismatch, communication
halted.
492
Comments
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced
The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The copilot radios are set on mute.
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or types installed.
Crossfill is off. Check the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the Aux-System Status Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or types installed. Check
the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AuxSystem Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Check
the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AuxSystem Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
Disable AFCS APPR mode to enable VNAV
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Disable AFCS APPR mode to enable VNAV
A failure or disagreement has been detected in a DME receiver. Check position
sensors.
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 64W has failed.
EIS
Message
DISABLE GP TO ARM CLIMB – Press
APPR button to enable VNAV track
change.
DISABLE GS TO ARM CLIMB – Press
APPR button to enable VNAV track
change.
DME CHECK RANGE – DME range
disagreement. Check position sensors.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The system should be serviced.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The system should be serviced.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1 software
The ADAHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
GDL 69/69A SXM configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
error. Config service req’d.
memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM. The receiver is
unavailable. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL software
The GDL 69/69A SXM has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
Config service req’d.
The system should be serviced.
GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1 software
The #1 GEA has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved ADAHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass.
flagged as invalid.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
mismatch, communication halted.
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GMA1 AUX MANIFEST – GMA 1 AUX
software mismatch, communication
halted.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
APPENDICES
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
INDEX
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
494
Comments
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA1 1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
operating temperature.
The GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be serviced
when possible.
The GMU has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
The ADAHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTS 800 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GTS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU. Heading is flagged as invalid. The ADAHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Data link avionics were not configured correctly and therefore will not be able to
communicate with the ground network.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
AFCS
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
APPENDICES
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The specified GDU has different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the specified GDU is
missing or invalid.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
EIS
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MFD SOFTWARE – MFD mismatch,
communication halted.
MFD TERRAIN DSP – MFD Terrain
awareness display unavailable.
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all course
angles.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTS CONFIG – GTS config error.
Config service req’d.
GTS MANIFEST – GTS software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTX1 MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
INVALID ADM – Invalid ADM: ATN
communication halted.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
MFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION –
MFD1 calibration. Return for repair.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
is stuck.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
NAV1 MANIFEST – NAV1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
Comments
The specified GDU’s backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system
should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
NAV1 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NAV2 MANIFEST – NAV2 software
NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
transfer key is stuck.
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NON-MAGNETIC UNITS– NonNavigation angle is not set to MAGNETIC at power-up.
magnetic NAV ANGLE display units
are active.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
for navigation to [xxxx]
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint..
PFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION –
The PFD1 backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system should be
PFD1 calibration lost. Return for repair. serviced.
496
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
EIS
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for TAWS in PFD1 is missing or
invalid.
The PFD2 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The pilot radios are set on mute.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
APPENDICES
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Message criteria entered by the user.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
Comments
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is
stuck.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM –
Card 1 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM –
Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card
1 is invalid.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – Card
2 is invalid.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name] is
stuck.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD1 TERRAIN DSP – PFD1 Terrain
awareness display unavailable.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PILOT RADIOS MUTED – Pilot
radios are muted.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
SLCT MAG– Select MAGNETIC NAV
ANGLE display units.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
SLCT NON-MAG– Select alternate
NAV ANGLE display units.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
SURFACEWATCH DISABLED - Too
far north/south.
SURFACEWATCH FAIL - Invalid
audio configuration.
SURFACEWATCH FAIL - Invalid
configurable alerts.
SURFACEWATCH FAIL - One or
more inputs invalid.
SURFACEWATCH INHIBITED Surfacewatch inhibited.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available
terrain region.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB
resolution too low.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness
audio config error. Service req’d.
TERRAIN DISABLED – Terrain
Awareness DB resolution too low.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness
audio source unavailable
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
INDEX
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
498
Comments
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to Magnetic.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to True.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
Stormscope has failed. The system should be serviced.
The SurfaceWatch system has been disabled.
The SurfaceWatch system has failed due to an invalid audio configuration.
The SurfaceWatch system has failed due to invalid configurable alerts.
The SurfaceWatch system has failed due to one or more invalid inputs.
The SurfaceWatch system has been inhibited.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution is not
currently installed.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
TAWS is disabled because the audio configuration is invalid. The system should be
serviced.
TAWS is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution is not currently
installed.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
Terrain Awareness audio is unavailable. The system should be serviced.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Comments
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A failure has been detected in the 1090 receiver.
EIS
ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid GPS position.
Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The transponder is not able to receive position information.
The Transponder is incapable of processing traffic information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A failure has been detected in the UAT receiver.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is unavailable.
There is no communication with the #1 or #2 transponder.
The transponder is unable to receive ADS-B information.
The transponder is unable to receive FIS-B weather information.
AFCS
The system has detected an over temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unable to provide pressure altitude information.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an under temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
APPENDICES
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
XPDR1 ADS-B 1090 – Datalinik:
ADS-B 1090 receiver has failed.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – Transponder:
XPDR1 is unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
XPDR1 ADS-B NO POS –
Transponder: ADS-B is not transmitting
position.
XPDR1 ADS-B TRFC – Transponder:
ADS-B traffic has failed
XPDR1 ADS-B UAT – Datalink:
ADS-B in UAT receiver has failed.
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
XPDR1 CSA FAIL - Traffic: ADS-B In
traffic alerting has failed.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 FAULT – Datalink: ADSB-B in
has failed.
XPDR1 FIS-B WX – Datalink: FIS-B
Weather has failed.
XPDR1 OVER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder over temp.
XPDR1 PRES ALT –Transponder:
ADS-B no pressure altitude.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 UNDER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder under temp.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
499
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Blank Page
500
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
on flygarmin.com.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground.
Go to flygarmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
EIS
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards
are required for database storage as well as database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the ‘Aux – Databases’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the ‘Aux – Databases’ Page being displayed in amber.
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
AFCS
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the ‘Aux-Database’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Databases may be loaded through Garmin Pilot and Flight Stream 510. When loading databases through
Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510 must be enabled on the system and the multimedia
card inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD.
APPENDICES
The cycles and dates for both standby and active databases are displayed on the “Aux – Databases” page on
the MFD. Any active databases with expiration dates in the past will be highlighted with amber text. When
an expired active database has a standby database that is ready to become effective, a cyan double-sided arrow
will be displayed between the database cycles. When this arrow is visible, it indicates that the standby and
active databases in that row will be switched on the next power cycle, activating the current standby database.
Databases can also be manually selected (or deselected) by highlighting a list item and pressing the ENT Key,
provided a valid, verified standby database is present.
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The navigation database contains the aeronautical data used by the system for the flight management and
flight planning functions. Included is detailed data for waypoints, procedures (arrivals, departures, approaches),
and airways. The navigation database is updated every 28 days.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
EIS
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
AFCS
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not
updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70
days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function. The ChartView database must be purchased
directly from Jeppesen, but can be updated at jeppesen.com or flygarmin.com.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The IFR/VFR charts database contains VFR and IFR raster charts. The VFR Charts are digital representations
of the Sectional Aeronautical Charts and Terminal Area Charts. The IFR Charts include both IFR High (designed
for navigation at or above 18,000 ft) and IFR Low (designed for navigation below 18,000 ft). IFR/VFR Charts
are updated every 28 days except for Canadian IFR/VFR Charts which are updated every 56 days.
502
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
190-02181-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UPDATING DATABASES USING A SUPPLEMENTAL DATA CARD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All databases are updated through a single SD card in the bottom slot of the MFD. When the card is
inserted, the databases on the card will be copied to standby and synchronized across all powered, configured
units. After update, the card is removed and the databases are stored on the system. When in standby,
databases are not immediately available for use, but stored to be activated at a later time.
Database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation Databases’ section
of the Garmin website (flygarmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website, a
PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto an
existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
EIS
• Windows-compatible PC computer
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Supplemental SD Cards
Updating Databases:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) With the system OFF, remove an SD Card from the top SD card slot of the MFD.
2) Download and install the databases on an SD card.
3) Put the SD Card in the top SD card slot of the MFD.
4) Turn the system ON.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
AFCS
8) Monitor the Sync Status on the ‘Aux-Databases’ Page. Wait for all databases to complete syncing, indicated by
‘Sync Complete’ being displayed. A cyan double-arrow will appear between the Standby and Active columns to
show which Standby databases will be transferred to Active at the next power cycle.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
1190-02181-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft G58
503
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-1 ‘Aux - Databases’ Page before Activation of Standby Databases
9) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown in the Standby column.
10) Remove the SD card from the bottom slot of the MFD if desired.
11) Remove and reapply power to the system.
AFCS
12) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
13) Turn the lar